1. business and industrial
2. construction

PROJECT MANUAL
– VOLUME 2 of 3
(Divisions 08 through 12)
UIUC - U12184
UIUC Turner Hall Crop Sciences & Soils
1102 South Goodwin Avenue
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS AT URBANA-CHAMPAIGN
URBANA (CHAMPAIGN COUNTY), IL 61801
BUILDING NO. 197
CONTRACTS: GENERAL
PLUMBING
HEATING
VENTILATION
ELECTRICAL
FIRE PROTECTION
USING AGENCY:
University of Illinois
BY: HARLEY ELLIS DEVEREAUX
1 EAST WACKER DR., SUITE 200
CHICAGO, ILLINOIS 60601
DATE: April 22, 2014
Issued for Bid
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Base Bid
1.
General Contractor
a.
1.2
Section includes hollow-metal frames and wood veneered stairwell hollow
metal doors.
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
DEFINITIONS
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to
NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
COORDINATION
Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time
for installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.
Section 08 14 16 "Flush Wood Doors" for doors set in hollow metal frames.
Section 08 80 00 “Glazing” for glass viewing panels.
Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fireresistance ratings, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.
Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1.
2.
Elevations of each door type.
Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal
thicknesses.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 11 13 - 1
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal
thicknesses.
Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
Details of each different wall opening condition.
Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
Details of accessories.
Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3
by 5 inches (75 by 127 mm).
For "Doors" and "Frames" subparagraphs below, prepare Samples approximately
8 by 10 inches (203 by 254 mm) to demonstrate compliance with requirements
for quality of materials and construction:
a.
b.
E.
1.6
Doors:
Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core
construction; face construction; and hinge and other applied hardware
reinforcement. Include separate section showing glazing if applicable.
Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers.
Include separate section showing fixed hollow-metal panels and glazing if
applicable.
Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the
supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as
those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for
tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and
exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.
1.7
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during
transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1.
Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
B.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack
welded to jambs and mullions.
C.
Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on
minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm)
space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
UIUC - U12184
08 11 13 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.2
A.
2.3
Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Pioneer Industries, Inc.
Republic Doors and Frames.
Kewanee
Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal doors with frames from single source from
single manufacturer. Obtain remainder of hollow metal frames from single sources and
single manufacturer.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection
ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure
according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed
and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and
installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for
materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and
clearances, and as specified.
B.
Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. At locations indicated.
1.
2.
Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.
Hollow Metal Faces Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).
Construction: SDI level 3 minimum. Face sheets are to be made of
commercial quality 16 gauge cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM
A366 or 620, welded to a steel channel frame.
Core: Cores shall be polystyrene bonded to both face sheets.
Frames:
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 11 13 - 3
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
a.
b.
4.
2.4
A.
Jamb Anchors:
2.
3.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame
size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps
not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire
anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less
than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe
spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at
each anchor location.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042
inch (1.0 mm), and as follows:
1.
2.5
Exposed Finish: Prime.
FRAME ANCHORS
1.
B.
Materials: Metallic-coated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 1692.
Construction: SDI level 3. 16 gauge minimum that complies with ASTM
A366 or A620. Frames to be constructed with closed and tight face miter
seams. Weld face miter seams. Grind and dress smooth weld area. No
knock-down hollow metal frames will be allowed. Reinforce frame to
accept closer, whether a closer is specified or not.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs:
fasteners.
Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive
MATERIALS
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
suitable for exposed applications.
C.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free
of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
D.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
E.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1.
F.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according
to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
UIUC - U12184
08 11 13 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
G.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Not allowed.
H.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as
measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
I.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);
consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
J.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
K.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos
fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.6
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately
form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness.
Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper
assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory
assembled before shipment.
B.
Hollow-Metal Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise
ratings indicated.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2
mm in 51 mm).
Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same
material as face sheets.
Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for
attachment of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material
as face sheets.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to
permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water
penetration.
Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where
required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend
minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or
as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or
handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of
same thickness metal as frames.
1.
Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no
visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame.
Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 11 13 - 5
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to
be grouted.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds
per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or
countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from
top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813
mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from
top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813
mm) o.c. and as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
c.
d.
6.
7.
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.
Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each
24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm)
high.
Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches
(152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26
inches (660 mm) o.c.
Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1067
mm) wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door
silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a.
b.
D.
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm)
high.
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm)
high.
Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each
24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm)
high.
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door
silencers.
Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
UIUC - U12184
08 11 13 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
E.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping
according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1.
2.
F.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers
where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.7
A.
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of
hollow-metal work.
Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that
each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior
doors and frames.
Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and
installation types indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1.
2.8
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surfacemounted door hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for
preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free
primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for
substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged
exposure.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical
anchors.
B.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4
mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations
before frame installation.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 11 13 - 7
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
C.
Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
E.
Frames in Masonry Walls: Door frames in masonry walls shall be back-primed with
bituminous coating and grouted solid. Provide a minimum of three anchors per jamb.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by
grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and
invisible on exposed faces.
B.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surfacemounted door hardware.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely
fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
Install all door and frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003 (R2008)
B.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated.
Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
1.
Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove
temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint
continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have
been properly set and secured.
Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with
grout containing antifreezing agents.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to
floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a.
Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of
postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop
Drawings.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
UIUC - U12184
08 11 13 - 8
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineralfiber insulation.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with
postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances
specified below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
D.
A.
Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or
minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm)
plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with
hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.4
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet
on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a
horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face
corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced
uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51
mm) o.c. from each corner.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before
final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and
replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or
otherwise unacceptable.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 11 13 - 9
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after
installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D.
Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing
repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for
factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are
specified in painting Sections.
END OF SECTION 08 11 13
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
UIUC - U12184
08 11 13 - 10 TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Work Includes:
1.
General Contractor
a.
b.
c.
1.2
Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
Factory finishing flush wood doors.
Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for
hardware.
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Section 06 10 53 “Miscellaneous Carpentry”.
Section 08 11 13 “Hollow Metal Wood Doors and Frames”.
Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge
construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind
of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of
hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.
D.
Samples for Verification:
1.
Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10
inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 14 16 - 1
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of
color and grain to be expected in the finished work.
Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with
door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
1.4
A.
1.5
Provide samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.
Provide samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate
required.
Finish veneer-faced door samples with same materials proposed for
factory-finished doors.
Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material and
finish specified.
Frames for light openings, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and
finish required.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of
custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
C.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,
"Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic
sheeting.
C.
Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is
operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
UIUC - U12184
08 14 16 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section.
Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a
3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.
Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to
repair or replacement of defective doors.
Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
Eggers Industries.
Graham; an Assa A bloy Group company.
Ideal Wood Products, Inc.
Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.
Oshkosh Architectural Door Company.
VT Industries Inc.
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products
that do not contain urea formaldehyde.
B.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
2.3
A.
VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces.
Species: To match existing doors
Cut: To match existing doors
Match between Veneer Leaves: To match existing doors
Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: To match existing doors
Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only
by mullions.
Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building.
Corridor-door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet
(3 m) 20 feet (6 m) or more.
Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces
Core: Glued wood stave.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 14 16 - 3
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
9.
10.
11.
2.4
A.
FABRICATION
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance
requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
2.
3.
A.
Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
Metal Astragals:
Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for
hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1.
2.
2.5
Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to
comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop
Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1.
C.
Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply
with applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
FACTORY FINISHING
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete
fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not
surface applied, before finishing.
1.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers
may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B.
Finish doors at factory.
C.
Use only paints and coatings that comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
D.
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Grade: Premium.
Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish or TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
Staining: To match existing
Effect: To match existing
Sheen: Semigloss.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
UIUC - U12184
08 14 16 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and
swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
Reject doors with defects.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware:
For installation, see Section 08 71 00 "Door
Section 08 71 11 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions
and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1.
C.
Hardware"
Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as
indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or
permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors,
edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1.
Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of
doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor
finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or
scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold
unless otherwise indicated.
a.
2.
3.
Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge
edges.
Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles
and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
D.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E.
Factory-Finished Doors:
required at Project site.
3.3
and
Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with
requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements
and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 14 16 - 5
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
END OF SECTION 08 14 16
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
UIUC - U12184
08 14 16 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
WORK INCLUDES
Base Bid
1.
General Contractor
a.
1.2
A.
RELATED WORK
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
This Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
Section 042000 “Unit Masonry” for ties and terminations of openings in masonry
walls.
Section 05500 “Metal Fabrications” for lintels in masonry openings.
Section 092216 “Nonstructural Metal Framing” for metal framing
Section 092590 “Gypsum Board” for finishes surrounding panels.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work. Plans shall include locations in building.
C.
Samples: For each door face material in specified finish.
D.
Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data
pertinent to installation.
1.4
A.
COORDINATION
Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain
access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in
the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
STEEL MATERIALS
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 31 13 - 1
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
1.
B.
ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
1.
ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
C.
Steel Sheet: electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M with cold-rolled steel sheet
substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
D.
Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
Factory-Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop primer.
E.
Drywall Beads:
compound.
F.
Plaster Beads: 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet with flange of expanded
metal lath.
2.2
A.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
A.
Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co.
Bar-Co, Inc. Div.; Alfab, Inc.
J. L. Industries, Inc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Milcor Inc.
Nystrom, Inc.
Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet to receive joint
4.
5.
6.
Locations: Ceiling surfaces.
Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal.
Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with drywall bead
flange.
Hinges: Continuous concealed piano or non-hinged.
Latch: Cam latch with interior release.
Lock: Cylinder.
7.
a.
Lock Preparation: Division 08 Section "Door Hardware”
Finish: Finish to match adjacent ceiling paint.
FABRICATION
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units
ready for installation.
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
UIUC - U12184
08 31 13 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth,
flat surfaces without blemishes.
C.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to
types of supports indicated.
D.
Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of
applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
E.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane
when closed.
1.
2.
F.
For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device.
Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective
coating on aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B.
Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face
panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
damaged.
END OF SECTION 08 31 13
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 31 13 - 3
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Work Includes:
1.
General Contractor
a.
1.2
Exterior and interior storefront framing including markerboards in labs.
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" for glass installation within store front framing.
DEFINITIONS
ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act
(ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the
following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure
due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
1.
2.
3.
Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not
limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated
live loads.
Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
Failure includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Deflection exceeding specified limits.
Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal
and structural movements to glazing.
Glazing-to-glazing contact.
Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural
movements.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
Sealant failure.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 41 13 - 1
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
h.
Failure of operating units.
B.
Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
C.
Structural Loads:
1.
Wind Loads:
a.
b.
D.
Deflection of Framing Members:
1.
2.
E.
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction
perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for
each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of
individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.
Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm), whichever is smaller.
Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to
ASTM E 330 as follows:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (40 m/s)
Exposure Category: A.
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do
not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural
distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2
percent of span.
Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10
seconds.
Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance:
Provide aluminum-framed
systems that pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to
ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 or AAMA 506.
1.
2.
Large-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located within 30 feet
(9.1 m) of grade.
Small-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located more than 30 feet
(9.1 m) above grade.
G.
Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through
fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area
when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of
1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
H.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do
not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
UIUC - U12184
08 41 13 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of
positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
I.
Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that
do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested
according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive
wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
J.
Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and
surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of
materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
2.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100
deg C), material surfaces.
Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress
on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested
according to AAMA 501.5.
a.
b.
3.
High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior
metal-surface temperature of 180 deg F (82 deg C).
Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C).
Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F (24 deg C).
K.
Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and
framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when
tested according to AAMA 1503.
L.
Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and
framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F
(3.23 W/sq. m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503.
M.
Sound Transmission: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and
framing areas having the following sound-transmission characteristics:
1.
1.5
Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 30 STC when tested for laboratory
sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E
413.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes
for aluminum-framed systems.
B.
Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for
drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 41 13 - 3
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware
types, functions, quantities, and locations.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's
standard sizes.
E.
Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed
systems, made from 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing
details of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Other Action Submittals:
1.
G.
Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of
supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well
as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule
with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function, and finish of entrance door hardware.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.
2.
1.6
Joinery, including concealed welds.
Anchorage.
Expansion provisions.
Glazing.
Flashing and drainage.
Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems.
Include design calculations.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum-framed systems, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Preconstruction Test Reports: For sealant.
E.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with
performance requirements.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
UIUC - U12184
08 41 13 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
F.
Source quality-control reports.
G.
Quality-Control Program for Structural-Sealant-Glazed System: Include reports.
H.
Field quality-control reports.
I.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.7
A.
1.8
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications:
indicated.
C.
Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including
Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard
units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.
D.
Product Options:
Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes
requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic
effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of
components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to
adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to
verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and
in-service performance.
1.
Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing
Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except
with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
E.
Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines, Illinois
Accessibility Code and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
F.
Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from
single manufacturer.
1.9
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminumframed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 41 13 - 5
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
1.10
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with
requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
B.
A.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does
not include normal weathering.
1.
1.11
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
Failure of operating components.
Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Entrance Door Hardware:
1.
2.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools
and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment,
maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six
months' full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware
Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of
worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for
proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide
parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of
original equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
EFCO Corporation.
Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
Tubelite.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
UIUC - U12184
08 41 13 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
4.
5.
2.2
A.
MATERIALS
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
A.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer,
complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface
preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to
recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable
SSPC standard.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
United States Aluminum.
Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel
company.
Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
FRAMING SYSTEMS
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Construction: Nonthermal, at interior only Thermally broken sheer block
assembly.
Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
Glazing Plane: Back.
Basis of design: Kawneer “Trifab VG 451T”
B.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C.
Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out
from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match
framing system.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel
inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 41 13 - 7
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
E.
Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by
manufacturer for joint type.
1.
2.
2.4
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of
250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing
and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
GLAZING SYSTEMS
A.
Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or
extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
C.
Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
D.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene
material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.
2.5
A.
ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors as modified herein for
manual-swing operation.
1.
Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members.
Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated
and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.
a.
2.
Door Design: Medium stile; 5-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width.
a.
3.
Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10
inches (255 mm) above floor or ground plane.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and
preformed gaskets.
a.
B.
Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate
aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the
interior.
Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
UIUC - U12184
08 41 13 - 8
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
2.6
ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with
requirements in this Section and Section 08 71 00.
B.
Opening-Force Requirements:
1.
Latches and Exit Devices: As specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
C.
Cylinders: As specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
D.
Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1.
Compression Type:
Made
ASTM D 2287, molded PVC.
of
ASTM D 2000,
molded
neoprene,
or
E.
Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed
fasteners on mounting strip.
F.
Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
G.
Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than
1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch (13 mm).
2.7
A.
2.8
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified
in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
FABRICATION
A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the
following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and
moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing
to maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and
exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to
greatest extent possible.
Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting
stops.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 41 13 - 9
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
D.
Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system.
D.
Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door
operation and for installing entrance door hardware.
1.
E.
Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1.
2.
F.
2.9
A.
At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in
adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.
At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the
greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware
before applying finishes.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in color
coat.
1.
Color and Gloss: Color to match existing exterior window finish by Linetec
“Sandstone LT607”. Submit samples for Architect’s approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration.
Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection:
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
UIUC - U12184
08 41 13 - 10
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
1.
2.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in
Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
E.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and
without warp or rack.
F.
Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
1.
Structural-Sealant Glazing:
a.
b.
G.
Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact
points.
1.
2.
H.
3.3
A.
Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants"
and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce
weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by
sealant manufacturer.
Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written
instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" to
produce weathertight installation.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection
tolerances:
1.
2.
Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12
feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.
Alignment:
a.
Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch
(1.5 mm).
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 41 13 - 11
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
b.
B.
3.4
A.
Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32
inch (0.8 mm).
Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch
(3 mm).
ADJUSTING
Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by
manufacturer.
1.
For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to
provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree
open position to 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading door
edge.
END OF SECTION 08 41 13
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS
UIUC - U12184
08 41 13 - 12
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Work includes:
1.
General Contractor
a.
Mechanical door hardware for the following:
1)
b.
c.
1.2
Swinging doors.
Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.
Electrified door hardware.
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Section 08 11 13 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for door silencers provided
as part of hollow-metal frames.
Section 08 14 16 "Flush Wood Doors" for astragals and integral intumescent
seals provided as part of labeled fire-rated assemblies.
Section 10 26 00 "Wall and Door Protection" for plastic door protection units that
match wall protection units.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and
finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:
1.
Wiring Diagrams:
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
For power, signal, and control wiring and including the
Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and
security systems.
Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware.
Point-to-point wiring.
Risers.
Elevations doors controlled by electrified door hardware.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 71 00 - 1
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
Operation Narrative:
door hardware.
Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic protective trim units in each finish, color, and
texture required for each type of trim unit indicated.
D.
Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type required, in each
finish specified, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. Tag Samples with full
description for coordination with the door hardware schedule. Submit Samples before,
or concurrent with, submission of door hardware schedule.
1.
Sample Size: Full-size units or minimum 2-by-4-inch (51-by-102-mm) Samples
for sheet and 4-inch (102-mm) long Samples for other products.
a.
E.
Full-size Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable
and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison
process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work,
within limitations of keying requirements.
Other Action Submittals:
1.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer,
detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation
procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors,
frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and
finish of door hardware.
a.
b.
c.
Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule after or concurrent
with submissions of wood door and hollow metal frame Product Data,
Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware
schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the
fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.
Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door
numbers as in the Contract Documents.
Content: Include the following information:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of
each door and frame.
Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings
on floor plans and to door and frame schedule.
Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type,
style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door
hardware product.
Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and
interfaces with other building control systems.
Fastenings and other pertinent information.
Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in
schedule.
Mounting locations for door hardware.
List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door
and frame.
08 71 00 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
1.4
Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing
Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram
and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the
Contract Documents.
a. All mechanical, electrical, elevator and telecommunications equipment
room door locks should be furnished with Corbin “60” keyways. All steam
tunnel and related door locks should be furnished with Corbin “99” keyways.
All janitor and recycling rooms should be furnished with Best 7-pin “M”
keyways. The F&S Locksmith Shop will provide keying for these rooms
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, from the manufacturer.
1.
Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled firerated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.
C.
Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on
evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a
qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.
D.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance
manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and
approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is
available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and
Owner about door hardware and keying.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.
Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware,
including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of
manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this
Project.
Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in
providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently
certified by DHI as follows:
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 71 00 - 3
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.
1.
Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door
hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
Manufacturers that perform electrical
modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.
D.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide
door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on
testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise
indicated.
E.
Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F.
Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the
latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
G.
Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route,
comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADAABA Accessibility Guidelines ICC/ANSI A117.1 and Illinois Accessibility Code.
1.
2.
Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting
of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).
Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a.
b.
3.
4.
H.
Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors:
5 lbf (22.2 N) applied
perpendicular to door.
Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not
more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.
Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees,
the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from
the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner and
Contractor, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware
Consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after
reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security
required, and plans for future expansion.
Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
Requirements for key control system.
Requirements for access control.
Address for delivery of keys.
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
08 71 00 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware
delivered to Project site.
B.
Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door
hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary
fasteners with each item or package.
C.
Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.
D.
Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package
service.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be
factory prepared.
Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate
provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated
requirements.
B.
Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with
Owner's security consultant.
C.
Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door
hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.
D.
Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to
existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required,
field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit
opening conditions and to provide proper door operation.
1.9
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless
otherwise indicated.
a.
Electromagnetic and Delayed-Egress Locks: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
b.
Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 5
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
1.10
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal
and replacement of door hardware.
B.
Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months'
full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly
preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,
lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door and door hardware
operation. Provide parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the
manufacture and installation of original products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware
Schedule" Article to comply with requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
B.
Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door
Hardware Schedule" Article.
Products are identified by using door hardware
designations, as follows:
1.
2.
2.2
Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and
named manufacturers' products and products complying with BHMA designations
referenced.
Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are
listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing
minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door
Hardware Schedule" Article.
References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these
designations and requirements for description, quality, and function.
HINGES
A. At exterior entrances that are regularly used by the public, aluminum storefront or curtainwall
entrances are typically selected. These entrances shall use adjustable offset pivot hinges as
described in B below. Other doors that are primarily service doors, convenience doors for stair, or
emergency only doors, may be provided as hollow metal doors and frames. These doors may be
provided with stainless steel ball bearing butt hinges. The number of hinges per door leaf shall be
determined by the size and weight of the door.
a. Type of Butt: Steel butts, planished and plated, similar to Stanley 179 are satisfactory for
interior doors without closers. For interior doors with closers, heavy weight doors, and high
frequency use doors, use ball bearing butts. Fire rated doors shall have steel or stainless
based ball bearing butts. Non-ferrous butts shall be used in locations where they will be
exposed to moisture.
B. Adjustable Pivots: Each exterior door shall have adjustable offset pivots and adjustable offset
intermediate pivots such as Rixon 195and M19. This allows adjustment to prevent dragging or
rubbing as buildings settle over time and as thresholds heave in the winter months. Non-adjustable
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
08 71 00 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
template hinges shall not be used on exterior doors. Pivots may be utilized on interior doors.
Continuous hinges are not allowed on any interior or exterior doors.
C. Preferred pivot hinges have a jamb mounted bottom pivot such as the Rixson 195 top and bottom
set. Pivots that may be used are:
a. Rixson 195 top and bottom set
b. ABH 0195 Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg, Inc., Itasca, IL
c.
DORMA OPJ350 DORMA Architectural Hardware
d. Ives 7215 Ives Hardware, A division of Ingersoll Rand
D. Pivots listed above are top and bottom sets. All require manufacturer’s compatible intermediate pivot
Use additional intermediate pivots for heavier doors. Select specific product based on weight of door
2.3
MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A.
Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.
B.
Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled
fire doors, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) latchbolt throw.
Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw.
Deadbolts: Minimum 1.25-inch (32-mm)bolt throw.
C.
Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Lock Trim:
1.
Description: provide one of the followings.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
2.
3.
4.
A.
Levers: Wrought or Cast.
Knobs: Wrought or Cast.
Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought.
Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.
Operating Device: Lever with escutcheons (roses).
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt
complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box
and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
1.
2.4
Best Lock: Stanley Works, Inc.: 45H-14H Series.
Sargent: Assa Abloy Co.: 8200 LNJ Series.
Schlage: Ingersoll-Rand Co.: L9000 - NO3 Series.
Flat-Lip Strikes:
For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as
recommended by manufacturer.
Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for
aluminum framing.
Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles.
AUXILIARY LOCKS
Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 71 00 - 7
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.
SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
2.5 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A.
Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31; Grade 1; with faceplate to suit lock and frame.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.6
A.
MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS
Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw; designed for
mortising into door edge.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.7
A.
Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Folger Adam Electric Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Hiawatha, Inc.
IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
Trimco.
EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS
Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
Precision Hardware, Inc.; Division of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc: Apex
Series.
c.
Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand company: 98 Series.
2.8
A.
LOCK CYLINDERS
Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or
nickel silver.
1.
B.
Manufacturer: Corbin-Russwin, No Substitute.
Standard Lock Cylinders:
BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores; face
finished to match lockset.
1.
Provide 7-pin uncombinated interchangeable core cylinders approved by the
UIUC Facilities and Services Locksmith Shop
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
08 71 00 - 8
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
C.
2.9
Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of
construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
KEYING
A.
Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28,
Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.
1.
Existing System:
a.
Keying to be done by the UIUC Facilities and Services Locksmith
Shop.
B.
1.
Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and
include the following notation:
a.
2.
A.
Cylinder Change Keys: Three.
Master Keys: Three.
Grand Master Keys: Three.
OPERATING TRIM
Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.11
Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.10
Keys: Nickel silver.
Forms + Surfaces.
Hager Companies.
Hiawatha, Inc.
IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
Trimco.
ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS
A.
Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactiveleaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in,
adjustable safety release; and with internal override.
B.
Carry-Open Bars: BHMA A156.3; prevent the inactive leaf from opening before the
active leaf; provide polished brass or bronze carry-open bars with strike plate for
inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used.
C.
Astragals: BHMA A156.22.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 71 00 - 9
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.12
A.
SURFACE CLOSERS
Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep
and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm.
Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers
depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.
Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for
opening force.
1.
2.13
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company: 4040 Series.
b.
Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company: 7500 Series.
AUTO OPERATORS
Auto Operators: BHMA A156.19; Provide low energy automatic operator units with
hydraulic closer. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and
requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to30 degrees F. Provide Units with conventional door closer opening and closing forces
unless power operator is activated. Provide door closer assembly with adjustable spring
size, back-check, and opening and closing speed adjustment valves to control the door.
Provide units with on/off switch for manual operation, motor start up delay, vestibule
interface delay, electric lock delay, and door hold open delay. Each operator shall
incorporate a safety feature that automatically re-opens the door if it is stopped during
the closing cycle. Under manual control, door opening force shall not exceed 8lbs for
exterior doors and 5 lbs. for interior doors.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
Horton 4000 Series.
b.
c.
d.
LCN 4600 Series.
Norton 6900 Series.
Besam Power Swing.
B. DOOR CONTROL STATIONS
1.
Provide door control stations on each side of each automatically operated door as
indicated on drawings. Coordinate locations with means of egress and life safety
requirements.
2.
For bollard mounted controls, provide INGRESS’R as manufactured by Wikk
Industries, Inc. P.O. Box 167, 6169B Industrial Court, Greensdale, Wisconsin
53129. www.wikk.com, or approved equal.
3.
For frame mounted controls, provide touch active automatic door by Norton, 6900
Series model #672 or approved equal.
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
08 71 00 - 10
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
2.14
A.
OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS
Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.15
A.
DOOR GASKETING
Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot
(0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as
tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.16
A.
Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc.
Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Hager Companies.
M-D Building Products, Inc.
National Guard Products.
Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Reese Enterprises, Inc.
Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated.
Zero International.
THRESHOLDS
Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.17
A.
Hager Companies.
M-D Building Products, Inc.
National Guard Products.
Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-)
thick stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw
fasteners.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 71 00 - 11
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.18
Baldwin Hardware Corporation.
Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.
Hiawatha, Inc.
IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. of InPro Corporation.
FABRICATION
A
Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by
forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper,
and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door
hardware units and BHMA A156.18.
B.
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with
commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum
fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to
match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is
closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use
through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed
unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where
through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves
for each through bolt.
Fire-Rated Applications:
a.
Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:
1)
2)
3)
b.
Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:
1)
2)
3)
3.
4.
5.
2.19
Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood
screws for wood doors and frames.
Strike plates to frames.
Closers to doors and frames.
Surface hinges to doors.
Closers to doors and frames.
Surface-mounted exit devices.
Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.
Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2,
"Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors."
Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications
and elsewhere as indicated.
FINISHES
A.
Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware
schedule.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces
DOOR HARDWARE
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
08 71 00 - 12
UIUC - U12184
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples.
Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance
of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor
construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring
connections before electrified door hardware installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and
frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.
B.
Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement
Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following
unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that
are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and
reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surfacemounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1.
2.
C.
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.
Wood Doors:
DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce
attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not
fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one
hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 71 00 - 13
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
E.
Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during
construction period.
1.
2.
Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner.
Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.
F.
Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control
system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.
G.
Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above
accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect.
1.
H.
Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening with electrified
door hardware.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of
sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
I.
Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in
door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
J.
Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
K.
Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
L.
Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is
closed.
3.4
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified
independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare
inspection reports.
1.
3.5
A.
Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and
state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from
requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and
adjusted.
ADJUSTING
Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each
door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be
adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final
operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced
accessibility requirements.
1.
2.
3.
Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close
freely from an open position of 30 degrees.
Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly
engage lock bolt.
Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Occupancy Adjustment:
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
Approximately six months after date of Substantial
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
08 71 00 - 14
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust
each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to
ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.
3.6
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.7
A.
3.8
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.
Refer to Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training."
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01
PROVIDE EACH SCHEDULED PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
FINISH MFR
1 EA
OFFSET JAMB MTD
-RIX
BOTTOM PIVOT
HINGE
1 EA
OFFSET TOP PIVOT
--RIX
HINGE
1 EA
POWER TRANSFER
EPT10
689
VON
1 EA
PANIC HARDWARE
CD-98-L-DT-996-03
US26D VON
ELEC PANIC
LX-RX-LC-QEL+-SD-98-L-NL-996-03
626
VON
1 EA
HARDWARE
2 EA
CONCEALED
9848
626
VON
VERTICAL ROD
2 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
1000-A02
626
COR
1 EA
RIM CYLINDER
3000-A02
626
COR
2 EA
OH STOP
100S
630
GLY
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
4040XP EDA
689
LCN
1 EA
SURF. AUTO
4642
689
LCN
OPERATOR
1 EA
PA MOUNTING
4040-18PA
689
LCN
PLATE
ACTUATOR, WALL
8310-853T
630
LCN
4 EA
MOUNT
2 EA
DOOR SWEEP
200NA
CL
NGP
1 EA
SADDLE THRESHOLD 425
719
NGP
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 15
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2
1
EA
EA
KEYSWITCH
POWER SUPPLY
653-04
PS902 900-2RS
630
LGR
SCE
VON
*WEATHERSTRIPPING BY ALUMINUM DOOR MANUFACTURER.
*BOTH KEYSWITCHES TO SHUNT OUTSIDE ACTUATOR.
*INSIDE ACTUATOR ALWAYS ACTIVE.
*HINGE, POWER CLOSER, SURFACE CLOSER AND MULLION FINISH TO MATCH ALUMINUM
DOOR.
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02
PROVIDE EACH SCHEDULED PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
2 EA
CONT. HINGE
55 B1 4.5XC.5
2 EA
FIRE EXIT
9827-L-F-LBR-996-03-499F-SNB
HARDWARE
2 EA
RIM CYLINDER
3000-A02
2 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
4040XP EDA
2 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 15" X 2" LDW
WALL STOP
WS406CVX
2 EA
1 SET SEALS
5050B
5070B
1 SET SEALS
FINISH
652
626
MFR
IVE
VON
626
689
630
630
BRN
BRN
COR
LCN
IVE
IVE
NGP
NGP
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03
PROVIDE EACH SCHEHDULED SGL DUTCH DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
FINISH
4 EA
HINGE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
652
1 EA
DUTCH DOOR BOLT
054
626
STOREROOM LOCK
L9080L 03N
626
1 EA
1 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
1000-A06
626
1 EA
OH STOP & HOLDER
100H
630
SURFACE CLOSER
4040XP
689
1 EA
1 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 15" X 2" LDW
630
MFR
IVE
IVE
SCH
COR
GLY
LCN
IVE
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 04
PROVIDE EACH SCHEDULED SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
FINISH MFR
3 EA
HINGE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
652
IVE
DOOR HARDWARE
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
08 71 00 - 16
UIUC - U12184
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
1
EA
1
1
1
EA
EA
EA
DBL CYL STORE
LOCK
MORTISE CYLINDER
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
L9466 L 03N
626
SCH
1000-A06
4040XP CUSH
8400 15" X 2" LDW
626
689
630
COR
LCN
IVE
FINISH
652
626
626
689
630
MFR
IVE
SCH
COR
LCN
IVE
FINISH
652
626
MFR
IVE
IVE
626
626
IVE
SCH
626
626
689
630
BLK
SCH
COR
LCN
IVE
IVE
FINISH
652
MFR
IVE
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 05
PROVIDE EACH SCHEDULED SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
3 EA
HINGE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
1 EA
CLASSROOM LOCK
L9070L 03N
1 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
1000-A06
SURFACE CLOSER
4040XP CUSH
1 EA
1 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 15" X 2" LDW
*DOOR TO BE LOCKED FROM DRY LAB SIDE
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 06
PROVIDE EACH SCHEDULED PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
6 EA
HINGE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
2 EA
MANUAL FLUSH
FB458
BOLT
1 EA
DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2
1 EA
CLASSROOM
L9071L 03N XL12-751
SECURITY LOCK
1 EA
FULL DUMMY TRIM
L0172 03N
1 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
1000-A06
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
4040XP EDA
2 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 15" X 2" LDW
2 EA
FLOOR STOP
FS18S
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 07
PROVIDE EACH SCHEDULED PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
6 EA
HINGE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 71 00 - 17
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2
EA
1
1
EA
EA
1
1
1
2
2
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
MANUAL FLUSH
BOLT
DUST PROOF STRIKE
CLASSROOM
SECURITY
FULL DUMMY TRIM
MORTISE CYLINDER
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
FLOOR STOP
FB458
626
IVE
DP2
L9071L 803N 03N XL12-751
626
626
IVE
SCH
L0172 03N
1000-A06
4040XP EDA
8400 15" X 2" LDW
FS18S
626
626
689
630
BLK
SCH
COR
LCN
IVE
IVE
FINISH
652
626
626
689
630
MFR
IVE
SCH
COR
LCN
IVE
FINISH
652
626
689
630
BLK
BRN
BRN
MFR
IVE
COR
LCN
IVE
IVE
NGP
NGP
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 08
PROVIDE EACH SCHEDULED SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
3 EA
HINGE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
1 EA
STOREROOM LOCK
L9080L 03N
2 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
1000-A06
SURFACE CLOSER
4040XP CUSH
1 EA
1 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 15" X 2" LDW
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 09
PROVIDE EACH SCHEDULED PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
6 EA
HINGE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
2 EA
RIM CYLINDER
3000-A02
SURFACE CLOSER
4040XP
2 EA
2 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 15" X 2" LDW
FLOOR STOP
FS18S
2 EA
1 SET SEALS
5050B
1 SET SEALS
5070B
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 10
PROVIDE EACH SCHEDULED SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
FINISH MFR
3 EA
HINGE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
652
IVE
1 EA
STOREROOM LOCK
L9080L 803N 03N
626
SCH
DOOR HARDWARE
TURNER
HALL
CROP
SCIENCES
08 71 00 - 18
UIUC - U12184
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
1
1
1
1
1
EA
EA
EA
SET
EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
SEALS
DOOR SWEEP
1000-A06
4040XP CUSH
8400 15" X 2" LDW
5050B
200NA
626
689
630
BRN
CL
COR
LCN
IVE
NGP
NGP
FINISH
652
626
626
626
689
630
MFR
IVE
IVE
SCH
COR
LCN
IVE
FINISH
652
626
MFR
IVE
IVE
626
626
626
626
630
689
630
IVE
SCH
SCH
COR
GLY
LCN
IVE
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 11
PROVIDE EACH SCHEDULED SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
3 EA
HINGE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
1 EA
DUTCH DOOR BOLT
054
1 EA
CLASSROOM LOCK
L9070L 03N
MORTISE CYLINDER
1000-A06
1 EA
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
4040XP HCUSH
KICK PLATE
8400 15" X 2" LDW
1 EA
*DOOR TO LOCKED FROM WET LAB SIDE.
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 12
PROVIDE EACH SCHEDULED PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:
QTY
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG NUMBER
6 EA
HINGE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
2 EA
MANUAL FLUSH
FB458
BOLT
1 EA
DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2
1 EA
STOREROOM LOCK
L9080L 03N
1 EA
FULL DUMMY TRIM
L0172 03N
1 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
1000-A06
2 EA
OH STOP
90S
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
4040XP CUSH
2 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 15" X 2" LDW
END OF SECTION 08 71 00
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 71 00 - 19
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
DOOR HARDWARE
UIUC - U12184
08 71 00 - 20
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Work includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to
this Section:
1.
1.2
General Contractor
a.
Doors
b.
Storefront framing
c.
Writing (whiteboard) surfaces
d.
Display cases
e.
Patterned glass
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Section 05 73 00 "Decorative Metal Railings" for glass panels in railings.
Section 08 14 16 “Flush Wood Doors”.
Section 08 41 13 "Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts."
DEFINITIONS
A.
Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as
defined in referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
ASTM C 1036.
C.
Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
D.
Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups
are
constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review
coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and
to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not
Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by
which the Work will be judged.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 80 00 - 1
GLAZING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind
and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage
attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of
sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials;
or other defects in construction.
B.
Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis
according to ASTM E 1300 or ICC's 2006 International Building Code by a qualified
professional engineer, using the following design criteria:
1.
Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical,
design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for shortduration load.
2.
Glass Type Factors for Wired, Patterned, and Sandblasted Glass:
a.
Short-Duration Glass Type Factor for Patterned Glass: 1.0.
b.
Long-Duration Glass Type Factor for Patterned Glass: 0.6.
c.
Short-Duration Glass Type Factor for Sandblasted Glass: 0.5.
3.
4.
C.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1.
1.5
Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at
thinnest part of the glass.
Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit centerof-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the shortside length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Glass Samples: For each type of glass product specified, 12 inches square. Include
insulating glass.
C.
Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and
location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
D.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For g lass indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E.
Shop Drawings: For backlit glass wall mockup, provide plans, sections, and elevations,
indicating materials and size of mockup construction.
1.
Refer to drawings for scope, location and work included in backlit glass wall
mockup.
GLAZING
UIUC - U12184
08 80 00 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
3.
1.6
Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.
Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two
dimensions.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.
B.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for tinted glass, coated glass, patterned glass and insulating
glass.
C.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E
Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass
manufacturer.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this
Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass
Installer Program.
C.
Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain patterned glass, float glass, tinted float glass,
coated float glass, backpainted magnetic glass and insulating glass from single source
from single manufacturer for each glass type.
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and
avoid delays.
Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after
installation.
Review construction and schedule for owner review of on site mockup.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for
each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements,
using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated on drawings.
Notify Architect and Owner seven days in advance of dates and times when
mockups will be constructed.
Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ
workers that will be employed during the construction at Project.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects, lighting effects, appropriate
materials and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's and Owner’s approval of mockups before starting work,
fabrication, or construction.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 80 00 - 3
GLAZING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
6.
7.
1.8
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
Construct mockup in location indicated on drawings. Approved mockup or
portions thereof may be used as final in-place installation at contractor’s
discretion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent
damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
B.
Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and
sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
1.9
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers
and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other
causes.
1.
1.10
A.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard
form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace glass units that deteriorate
within specified warranty period. Deterioration of glass is defined as defects developed
from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and
cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include
peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.
1.
B.
Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature
conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40
deg F (4.4 deg C).
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in
which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that
deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined
as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or
to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written
instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on
interior surfaces of glass.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
GLAZING
UIUC - U12184
08 80 00 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in
thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
1.
2.
Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 8 mm.
Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated
throughout Project.
B.
Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heattreated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with
"Performance Requirements" Article.
C.
Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes enhancedprotection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 1 when tested
according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length
than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as
glazing indicated for use on the Project.
1.
2.
D.
Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance
properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on
procedures indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
A.
Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade.
Small-Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above grade.
For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 8.0 mm thick.
For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction
indicated.
For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for
overall unit and for each lite.
U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on
LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F
(W/sq. m x K).
Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
GLASS PRODUCTS
Clear Float Glass (GL-3): ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I, complying with
other requirements specified and with visible light transmission not less than 91
percent.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide by one of the
following manufacturers:
a.
AFG Industries, Inc
b.
Guardian Industries Corp.
c.
Pilkington North America
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 80 00 - 5
GLAZING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
d.
B.
Clear Tempered Glass (GL-4): ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear)
unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1.
2.
3.
C.
D.
PPG Industries, Inc
Fabrication Process:
By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave
distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated
glass).
Polished Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 1, Quality-Q6,
complying with ANSI Z97.1, Class C.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
Ashai Glass Co./Ama Glass Co.
b.
Central Glas Co. Ltd.
c.
Nippon Sheet Glass Co.
d.
Pilkington Glass Ltd.
2.
Mesh: M2 (square).
Tempered Patterned Glass with Translucent Shop Applied Film (GL-1):
1.
2.
Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide etched
pattern glass with film overlay as indicated below:
a.
Manufacturer:
1)
Skyline Design
b.
Material and Finish:
1)
“Cascade” pattern @ 500% enlarged scale.
c.
Install shop applied film to back (non-etched) side of glass.
Decorative Film Overlay: Translucent, dimensionally stable, cast PVC film, 2-mil(0.05-mm-) minimum thickness, with pressure-sensitive, clear adhesive back for
adhering to glass and releasable protective backing.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
3M
2)
Solyx
3)
Llumar
b.
Material and Finish:
1)
White color.
2)
Translucency of film to be determined based on Architect’s and
Owner’s review of backlit glass mockup installation. Provide multiple
options for review to determine appropriate translucency percentage
for lighting installation.
c.
Apply squarely aligned to glass edges, uniformly smooth, and free from
tears, air bubbles, wrinkles, and rough edges, in single sheet completely
overlaying the back face of clean glass, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, including surface preparation and application temperature
limitations.
GLAZING
UIUC - U12184
08 80 00 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
2.3
A.
MARKER GLASS (GL-2)
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Backpainted Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in
16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use
materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical
and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
2.
3.
2.5
A.
Viracron.
PPG Glass.
Guardian Glass.
Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass
separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and
complying with other requirements specified.
1.
C.
Construction: Single sided magnetic backpainted glass.
Paint Color: White.
Provide standard finish - suitable for use with dry erase markers.
INSULATING GLASS
1.
2.
3.
B.
Skyline Design
Forms and Surfaces
Clarus Glass Ltd.
Sealing System:
Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and
secondary.
Spacer: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish
Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Articleas indicated by
designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article.
GLAZING SEALANTS
General:
1.
2.
Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and
with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of
insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions
existing at time of installation.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 80 00 - 7
GLAZING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
3.
4.
5.
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of
not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing
and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Clear.
B.
Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
C.
Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by
testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they
are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced
glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials
for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces
contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers:
manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85,
plus or minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement
(side walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of
size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum
glazing sealant performance.
G.
Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing
agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for
application and fire-protection rating indicated.
2.7
A.
MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES
Glass Type GL-1: Tempered patterned glass with translucent shop applied film.
1.
B.
Types recommended by sealant or gasket
Thickness: 3/8” minimum
Glass Type GL-2: Clear tempered with white magnetic backpaint.
GLAZING
UIUC - U12184
08 80 00 - 8
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
1.
2.
C.
Glass Type GL-3: Clear float glass.
1.
D.
A.
Thickness: 1/4” minimum
Glass Type GL-4: Clear tempered glass.
1.
2.8
Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3/8” minimum
Provide with finish designed for use with dry erase markers.
Thickness: 3/8” minimum.
INSULATING-GLASS TYPES
Glass Type GL-5: Clear insulating glass.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).
Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 5.0 mm min.
Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass color to match Viracron 1 Bronze #s.
Interspace Content: Argon.
Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass - clear.
Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .27 maximum.
Summer Daytime U-Factor: .30 maximum.
Provide safety glazing labeling.
Match appearance characteristics of existing glass on west face of building.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
END OF SECTION 08 80 00
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
08 80 00 - 9
GLAZING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
GLAZING
UIUC - U12184
08 80 00 - 10
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Work Includes:
1.
General Contractor
a.
b.
1.2
A.
RELATED WORK
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.
1.3
A.
Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board
assemblies.
Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits.
.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product. Include the structural data
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that
incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent
testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies:
For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90
and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal
unless otherwise indicated.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 22 16 - 1 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
C.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless
otherwise indicated.
Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645
1.
Steel Studs and Runners:
a.
b.
D.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 ga
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-)
deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs
friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches
(305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.
Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of
finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure
above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to
accommodate depth of studs.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
E.
Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and
contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to
accommodate depth of studs.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
F.
Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System.
Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System.
Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
1.
G.
Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track.
MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track.
Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.
Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 ga
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 ga
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 2
UIUC - U12184
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
H.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed
to reduce sound transmission.
1.
I.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with
minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum
uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm).
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch(1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter
wire.
SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B.
Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1.
2.
Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for
attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to
5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.
a.
Type: Postinstalled, chemical anchor, or Postinstalled, expansion anchor.
Anchors for hanger wires in a concrete deck shall be drilled-in wedge type
expansion anchors only. Power actuated fasteners shall not be used except in
concrete on metal decking or structural steel framing members.
C.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12
mm) in diameter.
D.
Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated.
E.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of
0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
1.
F.
Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).
Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1.
2.
Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with
minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
a.
b.
3.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 ga
Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) or as indicated on drawings.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 22 16 - 3 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
a.
4.
Resilient Furring Channels:
reduce sound transmission.
a.
2.4
A.
1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to
Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1.
B.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 ga
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to
substrates.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:
1.
Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit
steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollowmetal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements
and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Suspended Assemblies:
Coordinate installation of suspension systems with
installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for
anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing
required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.
1.
B.
Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for
installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1.
2.
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or
ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive
materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates
fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent
necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce
thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings
indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 4
UIUC - U12184
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that
apply to framing installation.
Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in
ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.
Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies:
Also comply with requirements in
ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that
apply to framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services,
heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4
A.
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater
than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
2.
3.
Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to
structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are
indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts
penetrating partitions above ceiling.
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,
install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of
finished assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door
frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb
studs.
a.
b.
Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum
1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of
control joint in finished assembly.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 22 16 - 5 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
c.
3.
4.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills
of openings to match framing required above door heads.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistancerated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
a.
5.
6.
b.
3.5
A.
Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent
to arcs.
Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally
along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs,
place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
Direct Furring:
1.
2.
F.
Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fireresistance-rated assembly indicated.
Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly
indicated.
Curved Partitions:
a.
E.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.
Screw to wood framing.
Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry
attachment spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not
more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater
than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
2.
3.
Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
B.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated
by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 6
UIUC - U12184
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
a.
2.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective
means.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling
loads within performance limits established by referenced installation
standards.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure
and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause
hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger
inserts that extend through forms.
Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in
12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive
finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION 09 22 16
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 22 16 - 7 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 8
UIUC - U12184
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 09 23 00 - GYPSUM PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
WORK INCLUDES
Base Bid:
1.
General Contractor:
a.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Gypsum plasterwork on existing painted, existing unpainted and newly
installed unit masonry.
Section 04 20 00 “Unit Masonry” for plaster substrate.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including bonding agent.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints
including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other
work.
C.
Mockup: Provide two 4’ x 4’ mockups of plaster work for Owner review. One mockup
shall be at existing CMU and one shall be at newly installed masonry.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface
area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1.
Install mockups for the following applications:
a.
b.
Troweled Finishes: Surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint
finishes.
Provide separate mockups for plaster over existing painted CMU and newly
installed CMU.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 23 00 - 1
GYPSUM PLASTERING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
3.
1.5
A.
1.6
Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and
other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with ASTM C 842 requirements or gypsum plaster manufacturer's written
recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Room Temperatures: Maintain temperatures at not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or
greater than 80 deg F (27 deg C) for at least seven days before application of gypsum
plaster, continuously during application, and for seven days after plaster has set or until
plaster has dried.
C.
Avoid conditions that result in gypsum plaster drying out too quickly.
1.
2.
3.
Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster.
Maintain relative humidity levels for prevailing ambient temperature that produce
normal drying conditions.
Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting
surfaces during plaster application and until plaster is dry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
GYPSUM PLASTER ASSEMBLIES
Low-Emitting Materials: Gypsum plaster assemblies shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using
Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 841 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
B.
Metal Accessories.
C.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
GYPSUM PLASTERING
UIUC - U12184
09 23 00 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
CEMCO.
Clark Western Building Systems.
Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.
MarinoWARE.
Phillips Manufacturing Co.
Cornerite: Fabricated from expanded-metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60
(Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
Striplath: Fabricated from expanded-metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60
(Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.
a.
b.
9.
10.
2.3
Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated
stiffening rib; use on columns and for finishing unit masonry corners.
Bull nose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) minimum, with expanded
flanges; use at locations indicated on Drawings.
Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; squareedged style; with expanded flanges.
Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piecetype, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with
perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of
affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B.
Bonding Compound:
ASTM C 631 and as recommended by plaster materials
manufacturer. Submit plaster materials manufacturer’s endorsement.
C.
Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as
required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for
application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no
fewer than three exposed threads.
D.
Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475inch (1.21-mm) diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
BASE-COAT PLASTER MATERIALS
A.
Base-Coat Plasters, General:
Base Coat.
B.
Aggregates for Base-Coat Plasters: ASTM C 35, sand.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ASTM C 28/C 28M.
09 23 00 - 3
Basis of Design: USG Imperial
GYPSUM PLASTERING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.5
A.
FINISH-COAT PLASTER MATERIALS
Gypsum Ready-Mixed Finish Plaster: Manufacturer's standard, mill-mixed, gaged,
interior finish. Basis of Design is USG Imperial Finish Plaster.
1.
2.6
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
compatible with the base coat.
PLASTER MIXES
Mixing:
Comply with ASTM C 842 and manufacturer's written instructions for
applications indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine nonstructural and structural metal framing, substrates, and hollow-metal
frames, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful
effects caused by plastering.
B.
Clean and rinse all existing painted masonry.
C.
Clean and rinse all newly installed masonry.
D.
Remove all loose paint.
3.3
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Install according to ASTM C 841.
B.
Cornerbeads: Install at external corners.
C.
Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plasterwork, except where plaster passes
behind and is concealed by other work and where metal screeds, bases, or frames act
as casing beads.
D.
Control Joints: Install control joints with spacing between joints in either direction not
exceeding the following and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect:
GYPSUM PLASTERING
UIUC - U12184
09 23 00 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
1.
E.
3.4
A.
Partitions: 30 feet (9 m).
Install bonding agent or bonding compound at all cleaned masonry.
PLASTER APPLICATION
General: Comply with ASTM C 842.
1.
2.
3.
Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.1 mm in 3 m) from
a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot (3-m)
straightedge placed on surface.
Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or
accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where
casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from
metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.
Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.
B.
Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases.
C.
Base Coats:
1.
D.
Finish Coats:
1.
2.
E.
2.
3.
3.5
A.
Gypsum ready-mixed finish
Provide smooth troweled finish.
Concealed Plaster:
1.
G.
Finish-Coat Mix for Smooth-Troweled Finishes:
plaster.
Provide minimum 2 coats 3/32 inch each.
Plaster Finishes:
1.
F.
Base Coats over Unit Masonry: Gypsum ready-mixed plaster.
Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar
furnishings, and equipment, apply finish coat.
Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in
similar locations, finish coat may be omitted.
Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile
and similar finishes, finish coat may be omitted.
Provide additional base coats as required to completely hide masonry joints.
PLASTER REPAIRS
Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check
cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to
substrate has failed.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 23 00 - 5
GYPSUM PLASTERING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
3.6
A.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster
from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair
floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during
plastering.
END OF SECTION 09 23 00
GYPSUM PLASTERING
UIUC - U12184
09 23 00 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Work Includes:
1.
General Contractor
a.
1.2
Interior gypsum board.
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For the following products:
1.
1.4
A.
Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each
trim accessory indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 60
sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality
standards for materials and execution.
1.
Install mockups for the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
Each texture finish indicated.
Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings,
on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 29 00 - 1
GYPSUM BOARD
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
1.5
A.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of
damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent
sagging.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and
conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are
mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies:
For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90
and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C.
Low-Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using
Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.2
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A.
Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus
one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 40 percent.
B.
Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and that correspond with support system indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD
UIUC - U12184
09 29 00 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
2.3
A.
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
C.
A.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.
Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
2.4
American Gypsum.
CertainTeed Corp.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
USG Corporation.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) Type ‘X’.
Long Edges: Tapered.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.5
Cornerbead.
Bullnose bead.
LC-f: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
Expansion (control) joint.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
C.
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface
areas, use setting-type taping compound.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 29 00 - 3
GYPSUM BOARD
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,
fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.6
Use setting-type
accessories.
compound
for
installing
paper-faced
metal
trim
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, allpurpose compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, allpurpose compound. Use to provide Level 4 finish.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping
compound.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and
setting-type, sandable topping compound.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards
and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
1.
2.
C.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
D.
Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing
of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members
from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex
sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
GYPSUM BOARD
UIUC - U12184
Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.
Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
09 29 00 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
3.
Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing
of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged,
and mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and
to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints
of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not
force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.
Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on
opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of
framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum
panels.
F.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1.
2.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or
smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq.
ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 29 00 - 5
GYPSUM BOARD
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
3.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural
members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at
these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed.
Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H.
Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is
attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at
openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install
acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.
Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for
locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies,
including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
J.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3
A.
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1.
2.
B.
Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings and all walls.
Type X: As indicated on Drawings or where required for fire-resistance-rated
assembly.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to
greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise
indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize
end joints.
a.
b.
3.
4.
C.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of panels.
At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with
no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
Multilayer Application:
GYPSUM BOARD
UIUC - U12184
09 29 00 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.4
On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base
layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base
layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing
member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or
furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member
with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistancerated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports
with screws.
Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a
substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board),
comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily
brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.5
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from
adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically
indicated as not intended to receive tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1.
2.
3.
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
Level 4: At exposed ceilings and surfaces with flat or matte paint.
Level 5: All other exposed surfaces.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 29 00 - 7
GYPSUM BOARD
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and
other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged
during drywall application.
B.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
UIUC - U12184
09 29 00 - 8
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
BASE BID
Work includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings for the
General Contractor.
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
C.
1.3
Section 09 51 23 "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for ceilings consisting of mineral-base
acoustical tiles used with concealed suspension systems, stapling, or adhesive
bonding.
Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and
other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 9 inches
(150 mm) in size. Include edge condition.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1.
2.
1.4
A.
Acoustical Panel: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and
texture.
Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (150mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the
items involved:
1.
2.
3.
Suspended ceiling components.
Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 51 13 - 1
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
4.
Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
1.5
A.
Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
Sprinklers.
Access panels.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity
installed.
Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal
to 2 percent of quantity installed.
Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
Impact Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project
site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned
space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity,
temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a
stabilized moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any
way.
1.7
A.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained
at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
UIUC - U12184
09 51 13 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1.
2.
C.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.2
A.
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the
listings of another qualified testing agency.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
Source Limitations:
1.
2.
Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single
manufacturer.
Suspension System:
Obtain each type from single source from single
manufacturer.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting
suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration
indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types,
patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for
each product type.
1.
2.3
A.
Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which
face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface
according to ASTM E 795.
Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by
referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers'
proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from
each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type,
pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS CL-1
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following to match manufacturer standards:
1.
2.
3.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Certainteed.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 51 13 - 3
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern
as follows:
1.
2.
Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted.
Pattern: E (lightly textured).
C.
Color: White.
D.
LR: Not less than 0.90.
E.
NRC: Not less than 0.70.
F.
CAC: Not less than 20.
G.
AC: Not less than 170.
H.
Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled Square.
I.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15 mm).
J.
Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
K.
Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment:
Provide
acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that
inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and
showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273
and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
2.4
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B.
Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung
metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated
that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.
1.
C.
High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for
"Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance".
Attachment Devices:
Size for five times the design load indicated in
ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
seismic design requirements.
1.
Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or
loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to times that imposed by ceiling construction, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable,
conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
a.
Type: Postinstalled expansion or Postinstalled bonded anchors.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
UIUC - U12184
09 51 13 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
b.
2.
D.
Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Not Allowed.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties:
requirements:
1.
2.
Provide wires complying with the following
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating,
soft temper.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of
wire, but provide not less than 12 gauge diameter wire.
E.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F.
Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with
0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-)
diameter bolts.
G.
Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips
spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees.
H.
Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact-clip system
designed to absorb impact forces against acoustical panels.
2.5
A.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM CL-1
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners
roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hotdip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating
designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
A.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Certainteed.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.
End Condition of Cross Runners: butt-edge type.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
Cap Finish: Painted white.
METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 51 13 - 5
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
1.
2.
3.
B.
Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if
not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that
comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material,
finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.7
A.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Certainteed.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge
details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration
of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.
For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that
forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and
flange at exposed suspension member.
For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetration exactly.
Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim:
Where indicated, provide
manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or
referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and
attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements and the
following:
1.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils
(0.04 mm). Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's
written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking
finish.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which
acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and
anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B.
Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet,
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
UIUC - U12184
09 51 13 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D.
Fasteners: Anchors for hanger wires in a concrete deck shall be drilled-in, wedge-type
expansion anchors only. Powder-actuated fasteners shall not be used except in
concrete on metal decking or structural steel framing members.
E.
48 Inch Spacing: All hanger wires shall be spaced no more than 48 inches apart in any
direction. Extra wires shall be provided near light fixtures, so that a wire supports each
corner of the fixture.
F.
Hanger Wires shall be installed as nearly vertical as possible. If an obstruction (such as
ductwork) interferes with spacing, a “trapeze” shall be used. Wires shall not be
supported from ductwork, conduit or piping, only the building structure. Both ends of
hanger wires shall be tightly wrapped with a minimum of 3 twists.
G.
Layout: The grid system shall be centered in the room when possible, in both
directions, so that the border tiles are of equal size. If the acoustical tile has a
directional pattern, the tiles shall be installed in the same direction, not alternating.
H.
In existing buildings, it may be necessary to lower the ceiling to an elevation below the
top of the existing window head. At such locations, raised soffits shall be provided in
front of the windows. See Drawing 09 51 23-01, Raised Soffit at Existing Window
Head. Soffit area shall be fully enclosed and shall provide sufficient clearance in front
of the window for painters and glaziers to maintain the window and surrounding
finishes.
I.
Attic Stock: Provide 3% extra attic stock of the same style, color and lot number of
ceiling tile for future patching and repairs.
3.2
A.
3.3
PREPARATION
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at
borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and
seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions
and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."48 Inch Spacing: All hanger wires shall be
spaced no more than 48 inches apart in any direction. Extra wires shall be provided
near light fixtures, so that a wire supports each corner of the fixture.
B.
Hanger Wires shall be installed as nearly vertical as possible. If an obstruction (such as
ductwork) interferes with spacing, a “trapeze” shall be used. Wires shall not be
supported from ductwork, conduit or piping, only the building structure. Both ends of
hanger wires shall be tightly wrapped with a minimum of 3 twists.
C.
Layout: The grid system shall be centered in the room when possible, in both
directions, so that the border tiles are of equal size. If the acoustical tile has a
directional pattern, the tiles shall be installed in the same direction, not alternating.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 51 13 - 7
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
D.
In existing buildings, it may be necessary to lower the ceiling to an elevation below the
top of the existing window head. At such locations, raised soffits shall be provided in
front of the windows. See Drawing 09 51 23-01, Raised Soffit at Existing Window
Head. Soffit area shall be fully enclosed and shall provide sufficient clearance in front
of the window for painters and glaziers to maintain the window and surrounding
finishes.
E.
Attic Stock: Provide 3% extra attic stock of the same style, color and lot number of
ceiling tile for future patching and repairs.
F.
Fasteners: Anchors for hanger wires in a concrete deck shall be drilled-in, wedge-type
expansion anchors only. Powder-actuated fasteners shall not be used except in
concrete on metal decking or structural steel framing members.
G.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum
of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for
hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs.
Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
H.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area
and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1.
2.
3.
Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical
legs of moldings before they are installed.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400
mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling
suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter
corners accurately and connect securely.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
I.
Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with
one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
J.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspensionsystem runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations
to provide a neat, precise fit.
1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by
flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with
bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped
flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspensionsystem surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.
Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of
exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose
by acoustical panel manufacturer.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
UIUC - U12184
09 51 13 - 8
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
6.
7.
8.
3.4
A.
Install hold-down clips in all areas indicated, in areas required by authorities
having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by
panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.
Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and
fixture as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions.
Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical
panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages. Do not
proceed with installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers for the next area until test
results for previously completed installations show compliance with requirements.
1.
Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on
each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed.
a.
b.
Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 poweractuated fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to
concrete and will test them for 200 lbf (890 N) of tension; it will also select
one of every two postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to
concrete and will test them for 440 lbf (1957 N) of tension.
When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with
requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested
until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.
B.
Acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered
defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
A.
CLEANING
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings,
and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.
Remove and replace ceiling
components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate
evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09 51 13
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 51 13 - 9
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
UIUC - U12184
09 51 13 - 10
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Work Includes:
1.
General Contractor
a.
b.
1.2
Resilient base.
Resilient molding accessories.
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 09 65 19 "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient floor tile.
C.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
E.
Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's
standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient
product color, texture, and pattern required.
1.3
A.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.4
A.
Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m)] for every 500 linear feet (150
linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient
product installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 65 13 - 1
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the
weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C)in spaces to receive
resilient products during the following time periods:
1.
2.
3.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C)or more than 95
deg F (35 deg C)
C.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
RESILIENT BASE
Resilient Base:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following to match manufacturer standards:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
Flexco, Inc.
Johnsonite.
Mondo Rubber International, Inc.
Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.
Roppe Corporation, USA.
VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1.
2.
3.
Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).
Style: Cove (base with toe).
C.
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
D.
Height: 4 inches (102 mm) unless noted otherwise.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
UIUC - U12184
09 65 13 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
E.
Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F.
Outside Corners: Job formed.
G.
Inside Corners: Job formed.
H.
Finish: Low luster.
I.
Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's sample.
2.2
A.
RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
Resilient Molding Accessory:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
Flexco, Inc.
Johnsonite.
Mondo Rubber International, Inc.
Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.
Roppe Corporation, USA.
VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
B.
Description:
covering.
C.
Material: Rubber.
D.
Profile and Dimensions: As indicated
E.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.3
Nosing for resilient floor covering. Reducer strip for resilient floor
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement
based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient
products and substrate conditions indicated.
1.
2.
Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 65 13 - 3
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements
specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,
scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion
of resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to
ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
a.
b.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission
rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed
with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative
humidity level measurement.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D.
Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where
they are to be installed.
1.
E.
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately
before installation.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
UIUC - U12184
09 65 13 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
3.3
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B.
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,
and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with
tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
D.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of
resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G.
Job-Formed Corners:
1.
2.
3.4
Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.
without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.
Form
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B.
Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to
substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of resilient
floor covering and vinyl composition tile that would otherwise be exposed.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient
products.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product
installation:
1.
2.
3.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period.
D.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair
treads before applying liquid floor polish.
1.
Apply two coat(s).
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 65 13 - 5
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
E.
Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 65 13
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
UIUC - U12184
09 65 13 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 09 65 19 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Work Includes:
1.
General Contractor
a.
1.2
Vinyl composition floor tile.
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Section 03 54 16 “Hydraulic Cement Underlayment” for leveling existing floors.
Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer
strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,
doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1.
Show details of special patterns.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.
D.
Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
E.
Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 65 19 - 1
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
1.6
A.
MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.7
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who
are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation
indicated.
1.
B.
A.
1.9
A.
Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or
certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
1.8
Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type,
color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on
flat surfaces.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive
floor tile during the following time periods:
1.
2.
3.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95
deg F (35 deg C).
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E.
Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
UIUC - U12184
09 65 19 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
FloorScore Compliance:
FloorScore Standard.
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
2.2
A.
Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of
VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following to
match manufacturer standards:
1.
2.
3.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Standard Excelon Imperial Texture.
Congoleum Corporation; Alternatives.
Tarkett, Inc.; (Axrock) Cortina Colors.
B.
Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.
C.
Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D.
Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
E.
Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
F.
Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's sample Basis of Design.
2.3
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement
based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and
substrate conditions indicated.
1.
Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
c.
2.
VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
Terrazzo Floor Tile Adhesives: Not more than 65 g/L.
Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 65 19 - 3
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
C.
Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements
specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,
scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion
of resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
a.
b.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission
rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed
with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative
humidity level measurement.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D.
Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be
installed.
1.
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
UIUC - U12184
09 65 19 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
E.
3.3
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately
before installation.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B.
Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to
avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
C.
Lay tiles square with room axis.
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same
sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked,
chipped, or deformed tiles.
1.
Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern).
D.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend
floor tiles to center of door openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
G.
Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint
covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color
and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly
adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H.
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to
substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and
puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface
imperfections.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 65 19 - 5
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
D.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile
surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.
1.
Apply two coat(s).
E.
Joint Sealant: Apply sealant to resilient terrazzo floor tile perimeter and around
columns, at door frames, and at other joints and penetrations.
F.
Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 65 19
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
UIUC - U12184
09 65 19 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Work includes
1.
1.2
General Contractor: surface preparation and the application of paint systems on
exterior substrates.
a.
Concrete.
b.
Steel.
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of
paint systems on interior substrates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
D.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E.
Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F.
Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
application instructions.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 91 13 - 1
Include preparation requirements and
EXTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of
topcoat.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
A.
A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color
applied.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1.
2.
1.7
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
VOC content.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
1.
1.6
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
Label each coat of each Sample.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B.
Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp
or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
Benjamin Moore & Co.
M.A.B. Paints.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
09 91 13 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
3.
4.
5.
2.2
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
Pratt & Lambert.
Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that
are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C.
VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
D.
Colors: As indicated in a finish scheduleAs Scheduled
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
PRIMERS/SEALERS
Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.
METAL PRIMERS
Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal: MPI #79.
SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS
Alkyd, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #94.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates:
moisture meter as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
When measured with an electronic
Concrete: 12 percent.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
Wood: 15 percent.
Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 91 13 - 3
EXTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with
existing finishes and primers.
D.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1.
3.2
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are
removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because
of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation
and painting.
1.
C.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or
apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and
chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted
exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust, existing loose paint, loose mill scale, and shop primer
if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not
less than the following:
1.
2.
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
F.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
G.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet
metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote
adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
3.3
A.
APPLICATION
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in
"MPI Manual."
1.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
09 91 13 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before
final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat
only.
Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of
exterior door frames.
Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory
primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B.
Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to
facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied.
Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until
cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in
sharp lines and color breaks.
3.4
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
2.
3.5
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with
paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing
and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies
with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints
by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged
or defaced painted surfaces.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 91 13 - 5
EXTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
3.6
A.
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1.
B.
Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.
b.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.
Steel and Galvanized Steel Substrates:
1.
Alkyd System:
a.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive for metal, MPI #79.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #94.
END OF SECTION 09 91 13
EXTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
09 91 13 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Work includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1.
General Contractor
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
1.2
Concrete.
Concrete masonry units (CMU).
Steel.
Galvanized metal.
Wood.
Gypsum board.
Plaster.
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of
paint systems on exterior substrates.
Section 09 23 00 “Gypsum Plastering” for painting plaster applied over CMU
Section 09 29 00 “Gypsum Board” for painting over gypsum board.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
D.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
E.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F.
Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 91 23 - 1
INTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
G.
1.4
Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
application instructions.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of
topcoat.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.
A.
A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color
applied.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1.
2.
1.7
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
1.
1.6
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
Label each coat of each Sample.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
1.5
Include preparation requirements and
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B.
Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less
than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
09 91 23 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following to match manufacturer standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.2
Benjamin Moore & Co.
M.A.B. Paints.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
Pratt & Lambert.
Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed
in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that
are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C.
Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using
Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D.
Colors: Match Architect's samples.
1.
2.3
A.
2.4
30 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.
BLOCK FILLERS
Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.
PRIMERS/SEALERS
A.
Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.
B.
Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149.
C.
Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 91 23 - 3
INTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.5
METAL PRIMERS
A.
Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107.
B.
Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal: MPI #76.
C.
Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.
2.6
WATER-BASED PAINTS
A.
Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #143.
B.
Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #145.
C.
Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #147.
D.
Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, (Gloss Level 4): MPI #140.
E.
Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #141.
F.
Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3):MPI #151.
G.
Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #153.
H.
Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #154.
2.7
SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS
A.
Alkyd, Interior, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #49.
B.
Alkyd, Interior, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #51.
C.
Alkyd, Interior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #47.
D.
Alkyd, Interior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #48.
2.8
A.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint
materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when
samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site,
samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and
certified by testing agency.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show
materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall
remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and
repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to
remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with
complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.
INTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
09 91 23 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates:
moisture meter as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
When measured with an electronic
Concrete: 12 percent.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
Wood: 15 percent.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
Plaster: 12 percent.
C.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D.
Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
E.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with
existing finishes and primers.
F.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1.
3.2
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are
removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because
of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation
and painting.
1.
C.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
D.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or
apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and
chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted
exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 91 23 - 5
INTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
E.
Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in
manufacturer's written instructions. Remove all loose and no adhered paint. Sand and
wash all existing painted concrete that is to be painted. Sand and wash all existing
painted masonry surfaces that are to be painted,
F.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using
methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the
following:
1.
2.
3.
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
G.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
H.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet
metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly
etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
I.
Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
J.
Wood Substrates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
K.
3.3
A.
Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or
plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign
material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
APPLICATION
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations
in "MPI Manual."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and
similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory
primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
INTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
09 91 23 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple
coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat,
but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate
coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until
cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in
sharp lines and color breaks.
E.
Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic
Safety and Security Work:
1.
Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.4
A.
Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
2.
3.5
Equipment, including panelboards.
Uninsulated metal piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Metal conduit.
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation
covering or other paintable jacket material.
Other items as directed by Architect.
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with
paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing
and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies
with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints
by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 91 23 - 7
INTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
D.
3.6
A.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged
or defaced painted surfaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
B.
CMU Substrates:
1.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3), MPI #145.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
E.
Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3), MPI #145.
Steel Substrates:
1.
D.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3), MPI #145.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5), MPI #147.
Wood Substrates: Including wood trim.
1.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a.
b.
Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
INTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
09 91 23 - 8
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
c.
F.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5), MPI #147.
Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates:
1.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss
Level 1), MPI #143 Ceilings.
Topcoat:
Latex,
interior,
institutional
low
odor/VOC,
(Gloss
Level 3), MPI #145 Walls.
END OF SECTION 09 91 23
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
09 91 23 - 9
INTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
This Page Intentionally Not Used
INTERIOR PAINTING
UIUC - U12184
09 91 23 - 10
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 10 11 00 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Work Includes:
1.
General Contractor
a.
b.
c.
1.2
Whiteboards.
Tackboards.
Visual display rails.
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" blocking.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Visual Display Board Assembly: Visual display surface that is factory fabricated into
composite panel form, either with or without a perimeter frame; includes chalkboards,
markerboards, and tackboards.
B.
Visual Display Surface: Surfaces that are used to convey information visually, including
surfaces of chalkboards, whiteboards, tackboards, and surfacing materials that are not
fabricated into composite panel form but are applied directly to walls.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes
for visual display surfaces.
B.
Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces.
details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Include plans, elevations, sections,
Show locations of panel joints.
Show locations of special-purpose graphics for visual display surfaces.
Include sections of typical trim members.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display surface indicated, for units
with factory-applied color finishes, and as follows:
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
10 11 00 - 1
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
1.
2.
3.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display surface indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
1.5
Actual sections of porcelain-enamel face sheet, tackboard assembly, display rail.
Fabric swatches of vinyl- fabric-faced tack assemblies.
Include accessory Samples to verify color selected.
Visual Display Surface: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm),
mounted on substrate indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type,
color, and texture required.
Trim: 6-inch- (152-mm-) long sections of each trim profile.
Display Rail: 6-inch- (152-mm-) long sections.
Accessories: Full-size Sample of each type of accessory.
Product Schedule: For visual display surfaces. Use same designations indicated on
Drawings.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics.
C.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6
A.
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units required for this
Project.
B.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
C.
Surface-Burning Characteristics:
As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
D.
Obtain visual display surfaces from single source from single
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
UIUC - U12184
10 11 00 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver factory-built visual display surfaces completely assembled in one piece without
joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size,
provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall
dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory,
disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site.
B.
Store visual display surfaces vertically with packing materials between each unit.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display surfaces until spaces
are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining
ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder
of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual
display surfaces by field measurements before fabrication.
1.
1.10
A.
Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication
might delay the Work.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in
which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities.
Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.
Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet:
ASTM A 424, enameling-grade steel, uncoated
thickness indicated; with exposed face and edges coated with primer, 1.7-to-2.5-mil(0.043-to-0.064-mm-) thick ground coat, and color cover coat; and with concealed face
coated with primer and 1.7-to-2.5-mil- (0.043-to-0.064-mm-) thick ground coat.
1.
Matte-Finish Cover Coat: Low reflective; chalk wipes clean with dry cloth or
standard eraser. Minimum 2.0-to-2.5-mil- (0.051-to-0.064-mm-) thick cover coat.
Cover and ground coats shall be fused to steel at manufacturer's standard firing
temperatures but not less than 1250 deg F (677 deg C).
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
10 11 00 - 3
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Natural Cork Sheet: Seamless, single-layer, compressed fine-grain cork sheet; bulletin
board quality; face sanded for natural finish with surface-burning characteristics
indicated.
C.
Plastic-Impregnated Cork Sheet:
Seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet
consisting of granulated cork, linseed oil, resin binders, and dry pigments that are
mixed and calendared onto fabric backing; with washable vinyl finish and integral color
throughout with surface-burning characteristics indicated.
D.
Vinyl Fabric: Mildew resistant, washable, complying with FS CCC-W-408D, Type II,
burlap weave; weighing not less than 13 oz./sq. yd. (440 g/sq. m); with surface-burning
characteristics indicated.
E.
Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered.
F.
Particleboard:
ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1, made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde., that complies with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
G.
Fiberboard: ASTM C 208.
H.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.
I.
Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
2.2
A.
WHITEBOARD (MARKERBOARD) ASSEMBLIES
Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards:
Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated
markerboard assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core
material, and 0.021-inch- (0.53-mm-) thick, porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss
finish.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
AARCO Products, Inc.
Best-Rite Manufacturing.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
Egan Visual Inc.
Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.
PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.
Particleboard Core: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick; with 0.013-inch- (0.35-mm-) thick,
galvanized-steel sheet backing.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
UIUC - U12184
10 11 00 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
2.3
A.
TACKBOARD ASSEMBLIES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.4
A.
Natural-Cork Tackboard: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, natural cork sheet factory laminated
to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick particleboard backing.
VISUAL DISPLAY RAILS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
A.
Provide continuous cork display rail, 2-2-1/2” tall with continuous magnetic insert.
Provide end stops at all ends.
WHITEBOARD AND TACKBOARD ACCESSORIES
Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-)
thick, extruded aluminum; standard size and shape.
1.
B.
AARCO Products, Inc.
Aywon.
Best-Rite Manufacturing.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
Egan Visual Inc.
Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.
PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.
General: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-framed, tackable cork visual display
surface fabricated into narrow rail shape and designed for displaying material.
1.
2.
2.5
AARCO Products, Inc.
Aywon.
Best-Rite Manufacturing.
Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
Egan Visual Inc.
Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.
Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.
PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.
Factory-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard.
Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous. Note some will be installed without a
markerboard.
1.
2.
Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and castaluminum end closures.
Provide at glass marker surfaces as shown on the drawing.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
10 11 00 - 5
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
C.
Display Rail/Map Rail (Magnetic Rail): Provide the following accessories designated
DSS-01 on drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.6
Display Rail: Continuous and integral with map rail; fabricated from cork 2 inches
(25 to 50 mm) wide.
End Stops: Located at each end of map rail.
Map Hooks and Clips: Two map hooks with flexible metal clips for every 48
inches (1219 mm) of map rail or fraction thereof.
Provide 2” high porcelain enamel steel magnetic strip, in frame to match display
rail above, below all display rails with tack strips.
Provide tack strip at top of all whiteboards.
Paper Holder: Extruded aluminum; designed to hold paper by clamping action.
Provide one paper holder for every part or fraction thereof on every 3 feet.
FABRICATION
A.
Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet
and backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's
standard flexible, waterproof adhesive.
B.
Natural-Slate Chalkboards: Surface slate panels to a natural plane. Grind and hone to
smooth, uniform finish equivalent to that obtained by minimum 180 grit and maximum
220 grit.
C.
Visual Display Boards:
indicated.
1.
Factory assemble visual display boards unless otherwise
Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to
visual display boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment.
D.
Factory-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim
and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.
E.
Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping
joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure.
1.
2.7
Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to
visual display units at manufacturer's factory before shipment.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
UIUC - U12184
10 11 00 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
2.8
A.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
1.
Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Chalktray continuous under glazing.
Map rail with display rail, end stops, map hooks and clips.
Locks.
Easel pad clamps.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display
surfaces.
C.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display
units will be installed.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair the performance of and affect the
smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards, including dirt, mold, and mildew.
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated
on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines
straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives,
brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.
1.
3.4
A.
Mounting Height: 7’-4” (914 mm) above finished floor to top of tackboard or white
board, inclusive of display rails.
INSTALLATION OF VISUAL DISPLAY RAILS
Display Rails: Install rails in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings,
or if not indicated, at height indicated below. Attach to wall surface with fasteners at
not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
10 11 00 - 7
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach
one cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.
B.
Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
C.
Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning.
END OF SECTION 10 11 00
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
UIUC - U12184
10 11 00 - 8
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 10 14 23 - PANEL SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Work Includes:
1.
General Contractor
a.
1.2
A.
1.3
Room-identification signs.
RELATED WORK
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.
B.
Illuminated: Illuminated by lighting source integrally constructed as part of the sign
unit.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent
construction by other installers.
B.
Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent
construction by other installers.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices and electrical service
embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before
fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.
Deterioration of embedded graphic image.
Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
10 14 23 - 1
PANEL SIGNAGE
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
PANEL SIGNS, GENERAL
Regional Materials: Panel signs shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of
Project site.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities Illinois Accessibility Code and ICC A117.1 for signs.
SIGNS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
Best Sign Systems Inc.
InPro Corporation.
Mohawk Sign Systems.
Nelson-Harkins Industries.
Room-Identification Signs: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and
characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and
profiles; and as follows:
1.
Laminated-Sheet Sign: Photopolymer nylon face sheet with raised graphics
laminated to aluminum backing sheet to produce composite sheet.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.
a.
b.
3.
Composite-Sheet Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.18 mm) min.
Surface-Applied Graphics: Applied paint.
Subsurface Graphics: Reverse etch image.
Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, minimum
100 color choices.
Edge Condition: Square cut.
Corner Condition in Elevation: Square.
Frame: Aluminum.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
PANEL SIGNAGE
UIUC - U12184
Material Thickness: 1/16”.
Frame Depth: ½”.
Profile: Square with angle perimeter.
Corner Condition in Elevation: Mitered.
Finish and Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
10 14 23 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
f.
g.
4.
5.
2.4
A.
2.5
Mounting: Adhesive two-face foam tape.
Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters and Braille, Optima SemiBold. Finish raised characters to contrast with background color, and finish
Braille to match background color.
ACCESSORIES
Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of
signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with
the following:
1.
B.
Frame size shall be a minimum of 1/8-inch and maximum of 1/4-inch larger
than the sign panel, in both height and width to allow for a reveal between
Panel and Frame.
Frame shall include 1/16-inch aluminum divider between Number and
Function panels, or as indicted on the Drawings.
Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.
Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch (1.14
mm) thick, with adhesive on both sides.
CATALOG OF SIGNS
1.
Type 1 - Room Number
a.
2.
Type 2 - Number and Room Name
a.
3.
1a: 3-inch by 3-inch Panel.
2b: Name and Number above second 3-inch by 9-inch panel with 3-inch by
3-inch pad of Post-It Notes below number panel.
Type 6 – Floor Level
a.
6A: Floor Level Identifier
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
signage work.
B.
Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without
gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Verify that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
10 14 23 - 3
PANEL SIGNAGE
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
D.
Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
General:
Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Mounting Methods:
1.
3.3
Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with
sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility
standard.
Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or
debris that would impair installation.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact
with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of
bituminous paint.
Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and
remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of
suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away
from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to
engage tape adhesive.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with
specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or
components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor
repair procedures.
B.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
C.
On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to
manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish.
Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until
acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 10 14 23
PANEL SIGNAGE
UIUC - U12184
10 14 23 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 10 21 23 - CUBICLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 BASE BID
A.
Work includes:
1.
General Contractor
a. Curtain tracks and carriers.
b. Shower curtains.
B.
Related Work:
1.
2.
3.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for supplementary wood framing and
blocking for mounting items requiring anchorage.
Division 9 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for supplementary metal
framing and blocking for mounting items requiring anchorage.
Division 11 Section “Laboratory Service Fixtures and Safety Equipment” for
emergency showers.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
2.
B.
Include durability, laundry temperature limits, fade resistance, applied curtain
treatment, and fire-test-response characteristics for each type of curtain fabric
indicated.
Include data for each type of track.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Show layout and types of cubicles, sizes of curtains, number of carriers,
anchorage details, and conditions requiring accessories. Indicate dimensions
taken from field measurements.
Include details on blocking above ceiling and in walls.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10
inches (254 mm) in size.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of curtain material indicated.
E.
Samples for Verification: For each type of product required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:
1.
2.
Curtain Fabric: 10-inch- (254-mm-) square swatch or larger as required to show
complete pattern repeat, from dye lot used for the Work, with specified treatments
applied. Mark top and face of material.
Mesh Top: Not less than 10 inches (254 mm) square.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
10 21 23 - 1
CUBICLES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
3.
4.
F.
Curtain Track: Not less than 10 inches (254 mm) long.
Curtain Carrier: Full-size unit.
Curtain and Track Schedule: Use same designations and room indications indicated
on Drawings.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For curtains, track, and hardware to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match
products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
Curtain Carriers and Track End Caps: Full-size units equal to 3 percent of
amount installed for each size indicated, but no fewer than 1 unit.
Curtains: Full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each size
indicated, but no fewer than two units.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
2.
3.
Build mockup of typical emergency shower, complete with track, and curtain.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of
the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Curtains: Provide curtain fabrics with the following characteristics:
1.
2.
Launderable to a temperature of not less than 160 deg F (71 deg C).
Flame resistant and identical to those that have passed NFPA 701 when tested
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Identify fabrics with appropriate markings of a qualified testing agency.
2.2 CURTAIN SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
CUBICLES
UIUC - U12184
ADC Hospital Equipment; Division of Automatic Devices Company.
10 21 23 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Alderman Acres Mfg, Inc.
Barjan Manufacturing Ltd.
Coldraco, Inc.
Covoc Corporation.
C/S General Cubicle.
Cubicle Curtain Factory, Inc.
Hospi-Tel Manufacturing Co.
Imperial Fastener Company, Inc.
InPro Corporation.
A. R. Nelson Co.
Salsbury Industries.
Extruded-Aluminum Curtain Track: Not less than 1-1/4 inches wide by 3/4 inch high
(32 mm wide by 19 mm high); with wall thickness.
1.
2.
Curved Track: Factory-fabricated, 12-inch- (305-mm-) radius bends.
Finish: Clear anodized.
C. Curtain Track Accessories: Fabricate splices, end caps, connectors, end stops,
coupling and joining sleeves, wall flanges, brackets, ceiling clips, and other
accessories from same material and with same finish as track.
1.
2.
3.
Suspended-Track Support: Not less than 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) square tube.
End Stop: Removable with carrier hook.
Switch Unit: Shuttle and coupling device for rerouting and securing cubicle
curtain, with pull chain for switching track.
D. Curtain Carriers: Two nylon rollers and nylon axle with chrome-plated steel hook.
E.
Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel.
F.
Concealed Fasteners: Stainless steel.
2.3 CURTAINS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
ADC Hospital Equipment; Division of Automatic Devices Company.
Alderman Acres Mfg, Inc.
Barjan Manufacturing Ltd.
Catalina Curtain Company.
Coldraco, Inc.
Covoc Corporation.
C/S General Cubicle.
Cubicle Curtain Factory, Inc.
Hospi-Tel Manufacturing Co.
Imperial Fastener Company, Inc.
InPro Corporation.
A. R. Nelson Co.
Salsbury Industries.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
10 21 23 - 3
CUBICLES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Shower Curtain Fabric: Curtain manufacturer's standard, polyester-reinforced vinyl
fabric; flame resistant, stain resistant, and antimicrobial.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Herculite, Inc.; Sure-Chek Linen.
b. InPro Corporation; Super Bio-Stat.
2.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Curtain Grommets: Two-piece, rolled-edge, rustproof, nickel-plated brass; spaced not
more than 6 inches (152 mm) o.c.; machined into top hem.
D. Mesh Top: Provide mesh top of No. 50 nylon mesh. Mesh top shall extend from track
to 7’-4” above finished floor.
E.
Curtain Tieback: Nickel-plated brass chain; one at each curtain termination.
2.4 CURTAIN FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate curtains as follows:
1.
2.
Width: Equal to track length from which curtain is hung plus 10 percent added
fullness, but not less than 12 inches (305 mm) added fullness.
Length: Equal to floor-to-ceiling height, minus depth of track and carrier at top,
and minus clearance above the finished floor as follows:
a. Shower Curtains: 3 inch (13 mm).
B.
3.
Top Hem: Not less than 1 inch (25.4 mm) and not more than 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) wide, triple thickness, reinforced with integral web, and double lockstitched.
4.
Mesh Top: Top hem of mesh not less than 1 inch (25.4 mm) and not more than
1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide, triple thickness, reinforced with integral web, and
double lockstitched. Double lockstitch bottom of mesh directly to 1/2-inch (13mm) triple thickness, top hem of curtain fabric.
5.
Bottom Hem: Not less than 1 inch (25.4 mm) and not more than 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) wide, double thickness and double lockstitched.
6.
Side Hems: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) and not more than 1-1/4 inches (32
mm) wide, with double turned edges, and single lockstitched.
Vertical Seams: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, double turned and double
stitched.
CUBICLES
UIUC - U12184
10 21 23 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Install tracks level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Up to 20 feet (6.0 m) in length, provide track fabricated from single, continuous length.
1.
Curtain Track Mounting: Surface.
C. Surface-Track Mounting: Fasten tracks to ceilings at intervals recommended by
manufacturer. Fasten tracks to structure at each splice and tangent point of each
corner. Center fasteners in track to ensure unencumbered carrier operation. Attach
track to ceiling as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Mechanically fasten directly to bottom of concrete deck with post-installed
anchors.
Mechanically fasten to furring through suspended ceiling with screw and tube
spacer.
Attach track to suspended ceiling grid with manufacturer's proprietary clip.
D. Track Accessories: Install splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and
joining sleeves, and other accessories as required for a secure and operational
installation.
1.
2.
Provide one locking switch unit for each pair of beds.
Provide one hinged loading unit for each bed.
E.
Curtain Carriers: Provide curtain carriers adequate for 6-inch (152-mm) spacing along
full length of curtain plus an additional carrier.
F.
Curtains: Hang curtains on each curtain track. Secure with curtain tieback.
END OF SECTION 10 21 23
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
10 21 23 - 5
CUBICLES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
CUBICLES
UIUC - U12184
10 21 23 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 10 26 00 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
WORK INCLUDES
Base Bid
1.
General Contractor
a.
b.
B.
1.2
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
RELATED WORK
Specified elsewhere:
1.
2.
1.3
A.
Section 081113 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” for door frames.
Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for metal armor, kick, mop, and push plates.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Structural Performance of Handrails: Provide handrails capable of withstanding the
following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of
materials for handrails, anchors, and connections:
1.
2.
1.4
Corner guards.
Door-protection systems
Concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (730 N/m) applied in any direction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, firetest-response characteristics, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and
finishes for each impact-resistant wall-protection unit.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall-protection unit showing locations and
extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
10 26 00 - 1
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit
indicated.
1.
D.
Include similar Samples of accent strips and accessories involving color
selection.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Corner Guards: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include examples of joinery, corners,
end caps, top caps, and field splices.
Impact-Resistant Wall Covering: 6 by 6 inches (150 by 150 mm) square.
Door-Surface Protection: 6 by 6 inches (150 by 150 mm) square.
Door-Frame Protectors: 12 inches (300 mm) long.
Door-Knob and -Lever Protectors: Full-size unit of each type.
E.
Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material.
F.
Material Certificates:
manufacturer.
G.
Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall-protection unit to include in
maintenance manuals.
1.
H.
1.5
For each impact-resistant plastic material, signed by
Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining
optimum condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions.
Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be
detrimental to plastic finishes and performance.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
manufacturer.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications:
An independent agency qualified according to
ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall-protection units through one source
from a single manufacturer.
D.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
impact-resistant wall-protection units and are based on the specific system indicated.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
1.
An employer of workers trained and approved by
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except
with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
UIUC - U12184
10 26 00 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
E.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall-protection
units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products
per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.6
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store impact-resistant wall-protection units in original undamaged packages and
containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling,
extreme temperatures, and humidity.
1.
2.
3.
Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21
deg C) during the period plastic materials are stored.
Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight.
Store plastic wall-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until
plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C).
a.
1.7
Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall-protection
units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and
HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F (21 deg C) for not
less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the
construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction
contiguous with impact-resistant wall-protection units by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.8
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall-protection units that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Structural failures.
Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
10 26 00 - 3
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
MATERIALS
Extruded Rigid Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant,
high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color
throughout; thickness as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of notch when tested
according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543.
Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B.
Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 6098, S-PC01, Class 1 or 2, abrasion resistant;
with a minimum impact-resistance rating of 15 ft-lbf/in. (800 J/m) of notch when tested
according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
C.
Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use
and finish indicated but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in
ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for Alloy 6063-T5.
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.
E.
Brass: ASTM B 249/B 249M for extruded shapes and ASTM B 36/B 36 M for sheet.
F.
Particleboard:
formaldehyde.
G.
Oriented Strand Board: APA PS2, Exposure 1 or 2, Sheathing grade.
H.
Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal
screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use securitytype fasteners where exposed to view.
I.
Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer for use with material being adhered to
substrate indicated.
1.
ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2; made with binder containing no urea
Use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
UIUC - U12184
10 26 00 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
b.
c.
2.3
A.
CORNER GUARDS
Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards: Assembly consisting of snap-on
plastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware;
fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
A.
Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Retainer: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, 1-piece, extruded aluminum.
Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching
cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.
DOOR-PROTECTION SYSTEMS
General: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
1.
B.
ARDEN Architectural Specialties, Inc.
Balco, Inc.
Construction Specialties, Inc.
IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation.
Korogard Wall Protection Systems; Division of RJF International
Corporation.
Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.100-inch (2.5-mm) wall thickness; in
dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings.
a.
2.4
Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
For fire-rated doors, provide door-protection systems that are UL listed and
labeled.
Door-Frame Protector: Fabricated from extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.050-inch
(1.3-mm) wall thickness; formed to fit entire door-frame profile.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
American Floor Products Co., Inc.
Construction Specialties, Inc.
IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation.
Korogard Wall Protection Systems; Division of RJF International
Corporation.
Height: 36 inches (914 mm).
Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Mounting: Countersunk screws through factory-drilled mounting holes.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
10 26 00 - 5
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate impact-resistant wall-protection units to comply with requirements indicated
for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
B.
Preform curved semirigid, impact-resistant sheet wall covering in factory for radius and
sheet thickness as follows:
1.
2.
Sheet Thickness of 0.040 Inch (1.0 mm): 24-inch (610-mm) radius.
Sheet Thickness of 0.060 Inch (1.5 mm): 36-inch (914-mm) radius.
C.
Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field
assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
D.
Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide
surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.
2.6
METAL FINISHES
A.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces.
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
Remove embedded
B.
Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
A.
Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for
blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the
locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.
For impact-resistant wall-protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape,
verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant
wall-protection system components.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
UIUC - U12184
10 26 00 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
3.3
A.
Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
INSTALLATION
General: Install impact-resistant wall-protection units level, plumb, and true to line
without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other
defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
1.
Install impact-resistant wall-protection units in locations and at mounting heights
indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below:
2.
Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for
a complete installation.
a.
b.
c.
B.
3.4
Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads.
Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet (6.1 m), splice
aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run,
but no closer than 12 inches (305 mm).
Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.
Impact-Resistant Wall Covering: Provide top and edge moldings, corners, and divider
bars as required for a complete installation.
CLEANING
A.
Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using
a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.
B.
Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 10 26 00
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
10 26 00 - 7
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
UIUC - U12184
10 26 00 - 8
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 11 53 13 - LABORATORY FUME HOODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 BASE BID
A.
Work Includes:
1.
General Contractor
a.
Bench-top laboratory fume hoods.
1)
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Double sided-sashed fume hoods.
Work tops within fume hoods.
Laboratory sinks and cup sinks in fume hoods.
Water, laboratory gas, and electrical service fittings in fume hoods.
Piping and wiring within fume hoods for service fittings, light fixtures, fan
switches, and other electrical devices included with fume hoods.
Bio-safety cabinets.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring fume
hoods.
Division 11 Sections “Laboratory Accessories” and “Laboratory Service Fittings
and Safety Equipment” for service fittings.
Division 12 Sections "Metal Laboratory Casework” and “Wood Laboratory
Casework" for fume hood base cabinets and base stands.
Division 25 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for controls field
quality-control testing of fume hoods.
Division 22, 23 and 26 Sections for connecting utilities at back and within fume
hoods. Piping and wiring are specified within this section.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Containment: Provide fume hoods that comply with the following when tested
according to ASHRAE 110 at a release rate of 4.0 L/min.:
1.
2.
3.
Average Face Velocity: 100 fpm (0.51 m/s) plus or minus 10 percent with sashes
fully open.
Face-Velocity Variation: Not more than 10 percent of average face velocity.
Coordinate with low flow/unoccupied vacation operation modes.
Sash Position: Half open.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
11 53 13 - 1
LABORATORY FUME HOODS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
a.
4.
5.
B.
Test with sash open 18”
Test Setup Modifications: Conduct tests with a minimum of three and a maximum
of five people in the test room and with two 1-gal. (3.8-L) round paint cans, one
12-by-12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-by-300-mm) cardboard box, and three 6-by-6by-12-inch (150-by-150-by-300-mm) cardboard boxes in the fume hood during the
test. Position items from 6 to 10 inches (150 to 250 mm) behind the sash,
randomly distributed, and supported off the work surface by 2-by-2-inch (50-by50-mm) blocks.
Walk-by Test: At the conclusion of containment test, execute three rapid walk-bys
at 30-second intervals, 12 inches (300 mm) behind the mannequin. Test-gas
concentration during each walk-by shall not exceed 0.1 ppm and shall return to
specified containment value within 15 seconds.
Static-Pressure Loss: Not more than 1/4-inch wg (62 Pa) at 100-fpm (0.51-m/s) face
velocity when measured at four locations 90 degrees apart around the exhaust duct
and at least three duct diameters downstream from duct collar.
C. Structural Performance: Provide fume hood components capable of withstanding the
following loads without permanent deformation, excessive deflection, or binding of
cabinet drawers and doors:
1.
2.
Fume Hood Work Tops: 200 lb/ft. (297 kg/m).
Fume Hood Base Stands: 50-lb/ft. (74-kg/m) work top, 75 lb/ft. (112 kg/m) on
work top, plus weight of hood.
D. Delegated Design:
Design fume hoods, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using seismic performance requirements
and design criteria indicated.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For laboratory fume hoods.
details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Include plans, elevations, sections,
Indicate details for anchoring fume hoods to permanent building construction
including locations of blocking and other supports.
Indicate locations and types of service fittings together with associated service
supply connection required.
Indicate duct connections, electrical connections, and locations of access panels.
Include roughing-in information for mechanical, plumbing, and electrical
connections.
Show adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components, laboratory
casework, and other laboratory equipment. Indicate clearances from above
items.
Include layout of fume hoods in relation to lighting fixtures and air-conditioning
registers and grilles.
Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment specified in other
Sections.
LABORATORY FUME HOODS
UIUC - U12184
11 53 13 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For fume hood exterior finishes epoxy sinks epoxy work
tops.
D. Samples for Verification: For fume hood exterior finishes interior lining and work top
material, in manufacturer's standard sizes.
E.
Product Test Reports: Showing compliance with specified performance requirements
for as-manufactured containment and static pressure loss based on evaluation of
comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing
agency.
F.
Source quality-control reports.
G. Field quality-control reports.
H. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of fume hood finish provided.
Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent
repairs to damaged fume hood finish.
I.
Contractor shall submit manufacturer's notarized certificate that products, adhesives,
paints, etc submitted and installed at project site do not contain asbestos or any other
banned product
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Laboratory Fume Hoods:
manufacturer.
1.
B.
Obtain fume hoods from single
Obtain from same source from same manufacturer as laboratory casework
specified in Sections 12 3510 and 12 3560.
Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, types, and configurations of fume
hoods by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers.
Other
manufacturers' hoods of similar sizes, types, and configurations, and complying with
the Specifications, may be considered.
See Section 01 60 00 "Product
Requirements."
C. Product Standards: Comply with SEFA 1, "Laboratory Fume Hoods - Recommended
Practices." Provide fume hoods UL listed and labeled for compliance with UL 1805.
D. Safety Glass: Products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials.
1.
E.
Permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing
Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
11 53 13 - 3
LABORATORY FUME HOODS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
F.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
G. Provide 1-year warranty for components and labor.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of
polyethylene film or another suitable material.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fume hoods until building is
enclosed, wet work and utility roughing-in are complete, and HVAC system is
operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels
during the remainder of the construction period.
1.8 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for lateral support of
fume hoods.
B.
Coordinate installation of fume hoods with laboratory casework, fume hood exhaust
ducts, MEP controls and plumbing and electrical work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Fume Hood Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following. Provide products from the same manufacturer as the
work specified in Sections 12 35 60 and 12 35 10.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Thermo Scientific - Hamilton.
Kewaunee Scientific Corp.; Laboratory Division.
Mott Manufacturing.
Bio-Safety Cabinets Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Thermo Scientific - Hamilton L.L.C.
Kewaunee Scientific Corporation; Laboratory Products Group.
Labonco
Lab Gard
2.2 MATERIALS
A.
Steel Sheet:
Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316, stretcherleveled standard of flatness.
LABORATORY FUME HOODS
UIUC - U12184
11 53 13 - 4
with
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
C. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester: Polyester laminate with a chemical-resistant gel
coat on the exposed face, and having a flame-spread index of 25 or less per
ASTM E 84.
D. Epoxy: Factory molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, nonspecular
finish.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Physical Properties:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
4.
Durcon Company (The).
Epoxyn Products.
Laboratory Tops, Inc.
Prime industries, inc.
Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi (70 MPa).
Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi (1400 MPa).
Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100.
Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent.
Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F (127 deg C).
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84.
Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following ratings when tested
with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:
a.
No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28
percent), benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate,
ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol,
sulfuric acid (60 percent), and toluene.
b.
Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent).
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Minimum 5
choices.
E.
Glass-Fiber Cement Board: ASTM C 1186.
F.
Glass: Clear, laminated tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1172, Kind LT,
Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3; with two lites not less than 3.0 mm thick and
with clear, polyvinyl butyral interlayer. Provide ¼” thick minimum at sides and back of
fume hood FH-08.
G. Fasteners: Provide stainless-steel fasteners where exposed to fumes.
2.3 FUME HOOD VENTILATION
A.
Bypass Fume Hoods: Provide bypass fume hoods unless indicated otherwise.
Compensating bypass at sash S.71 opens as sash is closed. Provide sufficient
bypass capacity so that face velocity with sash opening of 6 inches (150 mm) does not
exceed three times the face velocity with sash fully open.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
11 53 13 - 5
LABORATORY FUME HOODS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Variable-Air Control: Equip fume hoods with an electronic control unit with a sensing
device that monitors face velocity, and a motorized damper on the exhaust connection
that maintains a constant face velocity by controlling air volume in response to control
unit. Equip units with manual override switch that opens motorized damper to provide
maximum exhaust capacity regardless of sash position.
2.4 FABRICATION
A.
General: Assemble fume hoods in factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
fume hoods only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Fume hoods
shall be capable of being partly disassembled as necessary to permit movement
through a 35-by-79-inch (889-by-2007-mm) door opening.
B.
Steel Exterior: Fabricate from steel sheet, not less than 0.0478 inch (1.2 mm) thick,
with component parts screwed together to allow removal of end panels, front fascia,
and airfoil and to allow access to plumbing lines and service fittings. Apply chemicalresistant finish to interior and exterior surfaces of component parts before assembly.
C. Ends: Fabricate with double-wall end panels without projecting corner posts or other
obstructions to interfere with smooth, even airflow. Close area between double walls
at front of fume hood and as needed to house sash counterbalance weights, utility
lines, and remote-control valves.
D. Splay top and sides of face opening to provide an aerodynamic shape to ensure
smooth, even flow of air into fume hood.
E.
Interior Lining: Provide the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
F.
Glass-fiber-reinforced epoxy, not less than 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick, unless noted
otherwise.
Lining Assembly: Unless otherwise indicated, assemble with stainless-steel fasteners
or epoxy adhesive, concealed where possible. Seal joints by filling with chemicalresistant sealant during assembly.
1.
2.
3.
Fasten lining components together with stainless-steel cleats or angles to form a
rigid assembly to which exterior panels are attached.
Fasten lining components to a rigid frame assembly fabricated from stainless
steel and to which exterior panels are attached.
Punch fume hood lining side panels to receive service fittings and remote
controls. Provide removable plug buttons for holes not used for indicated fittings.
G. Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Epoxy Lining: Molded unit consisting of end panels,
back panel, preset rear baffle, and top bonded together into a single piece; reinforced
to form a rigid assembly to which exterior is attached.
1.
Punch fume hood lining side panels to receive service fittings and remote
controls. Provide removable plug buttons for holes not used for indicated fittings.
H. Rear Baffle: Unless otherwise indicated, provide baffle, of same material as fume
hood lining, at rear of hood with openings at top and bottom for airflow through hood.
LABORATORY FUME HOODS
UIUC - U12184
11 53 13 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
Secure baffle to cleats at rear of hood with stainless-steel screws. Fabricate baffle for
easy removal for cleaning behind baffle.
1.
I.
Exhaust Plenum: Full width of fume hood and with adequate volume to provide
uniform airflow from hood, of same material as hood lining, and with duct stub for
exhaust connection.
1.
J.
2.
3.
Fabricate from 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) nominal thickness steel sheet, with
chemical-resistant finish. Form into four-sided frame with bottom corners welded
and finished smooth. Make top member removable for glazing replacement. Set
glazing in chemical-resistant, U-shaped gaskets.
Glaze with laminated safety glass.
Counterbalance vertical-sliding sash with sash weight and stainless-steel cable
system to hold sash in place regardless of position. Provide ball-bearing
sheaves, plastic glides in stainless-steel guides, and stainless-steel lift handles.
Provide rubber bumpers at top and bottom of each sash unit.
Airfoil: Unless otherwise indicated, provide airfoil at bottom of fume hood face
opening with 1-inch (25-mm) space between airfoil and work top. Sash closes on top
of airfoil, leaving 1-inch (25-mm) opening for air intake. Airfoil directs airflow across
work top to remove heavier-than-air gases and to prevent reverse airflow.
1.
L.
Duct-Stub Material: stainless steel.
Sashes: Provide operable sashes of type indicated.
1.
K.
Provide preset baffles unless otherwise indicated.
Fabricate airfoil from stainless steel, painted to match fume hood housing.
Light Fixtures: Provide vaporproof, two-tube, rapid-start, fluorescent light fixtures, of
longest practicable length; complete with tubes at each fume hood. Shield tubes from
hood interior with 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) thick laminated glass or 3-mm-thick tempered
glass, sealed into hood with chemical-resistant rubber gaskets. Provide units with
fluorescent tubes easily replaceable from outside of fume hood.
1.
2.
Provide fluorescent tubes with color temperature of 3500 K and minimum colorrendering index of 85.
Provide vaporproof, acid-resistant, incandescent light fixtures complete with 100W, Type A, long-life bulbs instead of fluorescent fixtures at perchloric acid and
radioisotope fume hoods. Provide two fixtures for hoods up to 60 inches (1524
mm) long and one fixture for each 24 inches (610 mm) of length for longer hoods.
M. Base Cabinets: Comply with Division 12 "Wood Laboratory Casework."
N. Work Top Troughs and Sinks:
1.
Work Tops, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces free of defects. Make
exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly beveled. Where acid storage
cabinets are indicated beneath fume hoods, provide holes in work tops as need to
accommodate cabinet vents.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
11 53 13 - 7
LABORATORY FUME HOODS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
Resin Work Tops: Provide front overhang of 1 inch (25 mm), with continuous drip
groove on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm) from edge.
a.
b.
3.
Sinks, General: Provide sizes indicated or laboratory casework manufacturer's
closest standard size of equal or greater volume, as approved by Architect.
a.
b.
4.
Work Top Material: Solid.
Work Top Configuration: Raised (marine) edge, 1 inch (25 mm) thick at
raised edge, with rounded edge and corners.
Outlets: Provide with strainers and tailpieces, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), unless
otherwise indicated.
Overflows: Where indicated, provide overflow of standard beehive or opentop design with separate strainer. Height 2 inches (50 mm) less than sink
depth. Provide in same material as strainer.
Cup Sinks: Epoxy, 3-by-9-inch (75-by-228-mm) oval.
a.
Provide with polypropylene strainers and integral tailpieces.
O. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between fume hoods or fume hood
base cabinets and adjacent building construction. Fabricate from same material and
with same finish as fume hoods or fume hood base cabinets, as applicable.
P.
Ceiling Extensions: Provide filler panels matching fume hood exterior to enclose
space above fume hoods at front and sides of fume hoods and extending from tops of
fume hoods to ceiling.
Q. Finished Back Panels: Where rear surfaces of fume hoods are exposed to view,
provide finished back panels matching rest of fume hood enclosure.
R. Comply with requirements in other Sectionsfor installing water and laboratory gas
service fittings, piping, electrical devices, and wiring. Install according to Shop
Drawings. Securely anchor fittings, piping, and conduit to fume hoods unless
otherwise indicated.
2.5 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT FINISH
A.
General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after welding. Prepare, treat,
and finish components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners before
assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish concealed surfaces same as exposed surfaces.
B.
Preparation: Clean steel surfaces, other than stainless steel, of mill scale, rust, oil,
and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the
organic coating to be applied over it.
C. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply fume
hood manufacturer's standard two-coat, chemical-resistant, baked-on finish consisting
of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written
instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils
(0.05 mm).
LABORATORY FUME HOODS
UIUC - U12184
11 53 13 - 8
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
1.
2.
Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with
acceptance levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8. Acceptance level for
chemical spot test shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions.
Colors for Fume Hood Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range. Minimum 20 choices.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A.
Service Fittings:
Sections.
Comply with requirements in Division 12 "Laboratory Casework."
B.
Airflow Indicator:
type(s):
Provide each fume hood with airflow indicator of the following
1.
Indicator Type: Thermal anemometer that measures fume hood face velocity and
displays data as digital readout.
C. Airflow Alarm: Provide fume hoods with audible and visual alarm that activates when
airflow sensor reading is outside of preset range.
1.
2.
3.
Provide with aneroid (Magnehelic-type) gage airflow sensor.
Provide with reset and test switches.
Provide with switch that silences audible alarm and automatically resets when
airflow returns to within preset range.
D. Sash Alarm: Provide fume hoods with audible and visual alarm that activates when
sash is opened beyond preset position.
1.
Provide with silence and test switches.
E.
Sash Stops: Provide fume hoods with sash stops to limit hood opening to 50 percent
of sash height. Sash stops can be manually released to open sash fully for cleaning
fume hood and for placing large apparatus within fume hood.
F.
Provide occupancy indicator at front of sash.
G. Provide oval duct connection, suitable for exposure to view.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Demonstrate fume hood performance before shipment by testing one fume hood for
each type required according to ASHRAE 110 as modified in "Performance
Requirements" Article. Provide testing facility, instruments, equipment, and materials
needed for tests.
2.8 BIO-SAFETY CABINET
1.
2.
3.
Class I ducted with operable sash.
Basis of Design: Lab Gard NU-813E, size as shown on equipment plan.
Provide HEPA filter, base and stand.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
11 53 13 - 9
LABORATORY FUME HOODS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
4.
Provide custom size shown. Overall width shall be no less than 2” less than
alcove into which it is to be installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fume hoods.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fume hoods according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written
instructions. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims,
and securely anchor to building and adjacent laboratory casework. Securely attach
access panels, but provide for easy removal and secure reattachment. Where fume
hoods abut other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with
fasteners concealed where practical.
B.
Comply with requirements in Section 12 35 53 "Laboratory Casework" for installing
fume hood base cabinets, work tops, and sinks.
C. Comply with requirements for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings and
electrical devices.
1.
Install fittings according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3,
and manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink and work
top-mounted fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or work top
material. Securely anchor fittings to fume hoods unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field test installed fume hoods according to "Flow Visualization and Velocity
Procedure" requirements in ASHRAE 110.
1.
B.
Test one installed fume hood, selected by Architect, for each type of hood
installed, according to ASHRAE 110 as modified in "Performance Requirements"
Article. If tested hood fails to meet performance requirements, field test additional
hoods as directed by Architect.
Field test installed fume hoods according to ASHRAE 110 as modified in
"Performance Requirements" Article to verify compliance with performance
requirements.
1.
2.
Adjust fume hoods, hood exhaust fans, and building's HVAC system, or replace
hoods and make other corrections until tested hoods perform as specified.
After making corrections, retest fume hoods that failed to perform as specified.
C. Retest and rebalance all fume hoods 60 days after substantial completion.
LABORATORY FUME HOODS
UIUC - U12184
11 53 13 - 10
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
D. Provide clear label documenting successfully completion of each test, including test
dates.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust moving parts for smooth, near silent, accurate sash operation with one hand.
Adjust sashes for uniform contact of rubber bumpers. Verify that counterbalances
operate without interference.
B.
Clean finished surfaces, including both sides of glass; touch up as required; and
remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as
approved by Architect.
3.5 FUME HOOD SCHEDULE
A.
See Equipment Keynote Schedules on drawings.
END OF SECTION 11 53 13
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
11 53 13 - 11
LABORATORY FUME HOODS
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
LABORATORY FUME HOODS
UIUC - U12184
11 53 13 - 12
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 11 62 10 - LABORATORY SERVICE FIXTURES AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 BASE BID
A.
Work includes:
1.
General Contractor
a.
b.
Laboratory service fixtures
Laboratory safety equipment
1.2 RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Extent and types of laboratory service fixtures and safety equipment as indicated on
drawings.
C.
Provide service fixtures and safety equipment as specified herein and as indicated on
drawings.
D.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Division 10, Section “Cubicles”.
Division 11, Section "Fume Hoods".
Division 11, Section "Laboratory Accessories".
Division 12, Section "Metal Laboratory Casework".
Division 12, Section "Wood Laboratory Casework".
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Chemical Resistance: All coating materials shall meet the following tests for chemical
resistance:
1.
Fume Test: Suspend coated samples in a container at least 6 cubic foot capacity,
approximately 12" above open beakers, each containing 100 cc of 70% nitric acid,
94% sulfuric acid and 35% hydrochloric acid, respectively. After exposure to
these fumes for 150 hours, the finish on the samples shall show no discoloration,
disintegration or other defects.
2.
Direct Application Test: Subject coated samples to the direct action of the
reagents and solvents listed below at a temperature of 25 degrees C dropping
from a burette at the rate of 60 drops per minutes for ten minutes. Finish on the
samples shall not rupture, through slight discoloration or temporary softening is
permissible.
Acetic Acid (98%)
Acetone
Ammonium Hydroxide (28%)
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
11 62 10 - 1
Lactic Acid (10%)
Methanol
Methyl Alcohol
LABORATORY SERVICE FIXTURES
AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
Amyl Acetate
Amyl Alcohol
Bezene
Butyl Alcohol
Calcium Hypochlorite
Carbon Disulfide
Carbon Tetrachloride
Chloroform
Chronic Trioxide Acid
Cresol
Crude Oil
Dioxane
Distilled Water
Ether
Ethyl Acetate
Ethyl Alcohol
Formaldehyde (37%)
Formic Acid (90%)
Gasoline
Glacial Acetic Acid (99.5%)
Glycerine
Hydrochloric Acid (38%)
Hydrofluoric Acid (48%)
Hydrogen Peroxide (5%)
Isopropyl Alcohol
Kerosene
3.
4.
Methyl Ethyl Ketone
Methylene Chloride
Mineral Oil
Monochlor Benzene
N-Hexane
Naphthalene
Nitric Acid (70%)
Perchloric Acid (70%)
Phenol
Phosphoric Acid (75%)
Sea Water
Silver Nitrate (30%)
Sodium Bichromate (Saturated)
Sodium Carbonate (10%)
Sodium Chloride (20%)
Sodium Hydroxide (50%)
Sodium Hypoclorite
Sodium Sulfide
Sulphuric Acid (87%)
Tolune
Trichlorethylene
Turpentine
Urea (Saturated)
Xylene
Zinc Chloride (Saturated)
Mar and Abrasion Resistance: Coating material shall have a pencil hardness of
2H-4H with adhesion substantial enough to withstand both direct and reverse
impacts of 160 inch pounds. Coating shall have excellent mar resistance and be
capable of withstanding scuffing, marring and other ordinary wear.
Coating Repairability: Coating material shall be capable of surface repair in the
event that a fixture is scratched or a surface rupture occurs. The service fixture
manufacturer shall have available an air-drying aerosol coating, specially
formulated to match the existing epoxy coating color, which may be applied in the
field to repair coated surfaces.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for each type of
service fixture.
1.
2.
B.
Include independent laboratory certification that applied finish complex with
specified chemical and physical resistance requirements.
Submit samples of mechanical and electrical service fixtures, complete with
fittings and accessories with specified finish.
Service Color Code: Submit samples of index disc with letter code in colors used to
identify lab gas, water and air services listed.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
LABORATORY SERVICE FIXTURES
AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
UIUC - U12184
11 62 10 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
A.
Provide to Owner a complete touch-up kit for surface repair of service fixtures. Provide
an air drying aerosol or liquid coating specially formulated to match the coating color
which can be applied in the field to repair coated surfaces.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single Source Responsibility: All laboratory service fixtures and safety equipment,
including those provided as an integral part of other laboratory equipment such as
fume hoods, shall be the product of one service fixture manufacturer, unless specified
otherwise.
B.
All fixtures shall be in accordance with IBC, NFPA, OSHA, the State of Illinois
Plumbing Code, for the intended use.
C.
All fixtures for water service shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ASME A112.18.1M1989 and be certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) under Standard
CAN/CSA B.125.M89.
D.
All emergency eye wash and shower equipment shall be certified to comply with ANSI
Z358.1-2004.
E.
Vacuum breakers shall be certified by the American Society of Sanitary Engineers
(ASSE) under Standard 1001.
F.
Natural gas service, ball valves shall be certified by the American Gas Association
(AGA) and the Canadian Gas Association (CGA) to ½ PSI working pressure.
G.
Electric pedestal boxes shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) under
Standard UL514A. Receptacles shall be UL labeled and commercial or specification
grade.
H.
The entire installation shall be in accordance with the governing rules and regulations
of the National Electric Code, and all local governing boards having jurisdiction and
shall meet all the standards and requirements of the Owner.
I.
Warranty: 1-year
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.
All mechanical laboratory service fixtures shall be the product of one of the following:
1.
2.
Water Saver Faucet Co.
Chicago Faucet
2.2 FABRICATION; GENERAL
A.
All laboratory service fixtures shall have the construction and shall meet the
performance requirements set forth in this specification. Fixture types shall be as
indicated in the fixture schedule and fixture details on the drawings.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
11 62 10 - 3
LABORATORY SERVICE FIXTURES
AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Service Fixtures: Provide fixtures complete with washers, locknuts, unions, nipples
and other accessories for positive mounting to supporting laboratory units. Include
wall and deck turrets and flanges, escutcheons, and similar items required. Factory
assembly all fixtures and individually factory test each fixture.
C.
Material and Finish: Fabricate service fixtures from cast brass containing a minimum
of 85% copper or forged brass containing a minimum of 60% copper.
1.
Finish service fixtures and safety equipment as follows:
a.
2.
D.
Benchtop service fixtures at "accessible" locations shall be fitted with 4" wrist
blade handles, color coded.
Remote Control Valves for Fume Hoods:
1.
F.
For fittings inside fume hoods, exposed surfaces shall be epoxy powder coated in
color to match the fixture service index color.
Handles: Except as otherwise noted, provide forged brass four-arm style handles on
all fixtures. Handles shall have a screw-on index disc which is color-coded to match
the fixture service index color.
1.
E.
Remote control valves shall be mounted on the front panel of the fume hood, with
all components subject to wear accessible from the exterior face of the hood.
Valves shall have a threaded collar to hold the valve in place, and shall have a
forged brass body and a forged brass four-arm handle with a full view color-coded
type index disc. Valves for gas, air, vacuum and special gas service shall be
needle-type design with a self-centering replaceable stainless steel floating cone
and a replaceable stainless steel valve seat. Valves for water and steam service
shall have a renewable flat valve disc and a replaceable stainless steel seat.
Valves for Gas, Air, Vacuum and Special Gas Service:
1.
Needle Valves: (Note: Standard needle valves are used for good metering of all
services and for working pressures up to 125 PSI air pressure.)
a.
b.
G.
Exposed surfaces shall be satin chrome plated with a clear epoxy coating.
Needle valves shall have a forged brass valve body with a 3/8" IPS female
outlet for attachment of serrated hose ends, quick connects or other outlet
fittings. Valves shall have a self-centering replaceable stainless steel floating
cone and a replaceable stainless steel valve seat. The lateral movement of
the cone shall not exceed .0.15". The valve shall have a molded TFE stem
packing with an externally adjustable packing nut. The valve shall go from
closed to fully open in two full revolutions of the handle.
Needle valves shall be fully assembled and individually tested at 190 PSI air
pressure under water. Maximum working pressure shall be 125 PSI air
pressure.
Water Faucets and Valves:
1.
All faucets and valves for water service shall have a renewable unit containing all
working components subject to wear, including a stainless steel replaceable seat
and an integral adjustable volume control. The renewable unit shall be
interchangeable among all faucets and valves for water service. The renewable
LABORATORY SERVICE FIXTURES
AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
UIUC - U12184
11 62 10 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
unit shall be broached for position locking in the valve body. The unit shall have a
high durometer thermoplastic valve disc and a molded TFE stem packing. The
unit shall be capable of being readily converted from compression to self-closing,
and vice versa, without disturbing the faucet body.
a.
b.
2.
Water faucets and valves shall be fully assembled and individually factory
tested at 80 PSI water pressure.
Pre-Rinse unit.
Goosenecks shall have a separate outlet coupling with a 3/8" IPS female thread
securely brazed to the gooseneck for attachment of serrated hose ends,
aspirators and other outlet fittings. Rigid goosenecks shall have a 3/8" IPS male
inlet thread and be threaded directly into the faucet body so as to be absolutely
rigid. Swing goosenecks shall utilize a TFE packing with an externally adjustable
packing nut.
a.
b.
Gooseneck faucets at cupsinks shall have a rigid gooseneck.
Hot and cold water gooseneck faucets at lab sinks shall have a swivel
gooseneck.
3.
Vacuum breakers, where required and indicated by the fixture number, shall be
integral with the gooseneck. Vacuum breakers shall have a forged brass body, a
renewable seat and an ultralight float cup with a silicone gasket for fine flow
control. Vacuum breakers shall not spill over at low water volume.
4.
DI and Purified Water Faucets and Valves:
a.
Faucets and valves for distilled, deionized and pure water service shall be
fabricated with a brass exterior and an interior lining. The interior lining and
all components in contact with pure water shall be:
1) Inert Schedule 80 polypropylene.
2) Valves shall be manual or self-closing type (as indicated by the fixture
number), and shall have a round molded nylon handle, screw-on index
disc and a removable serrated hose end. Valves shall have a brass valve
body, brass bonnet and brass stem with a floating tip.
H.
Laboratory Ball Valves:
1.
2.
3.
I.
Laboratory ball valves shall have a forged brass valve body, a removable straight
ten serration hose end and a forged brass lever-type handle with a full view colorcoded index disc. Valves shall have a chrome plated ball and molded TFE seals
with self-closing retainers.
Ball valves shall be individually tested at 125 PSI air pressure under water. The
maximum working pressure for ball valves shall be 75 PSI air pressure. Where
used for gas service, valves are AGA-and CGA-certified to ½ PSI.
Laboratory ball valves shall visually indicate the position of the valve.
Stainless Steel Valves:
1.
Provide stainless steel valves as indicated on drawings. Valve bodies and
components shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Valve handles shall match those
specified elsewhere in this section.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
11 62 10 - 5
LABORATORY SERVICE FIXTURES
AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
J.
K.
Service Outlet Identification: Provide a colored plastic index disc with embossed
identification letters at each service fixture handle. Color code index discs as follows:
Service
Index
Color
Letter
Color
Symbol
Cold Water
Hot Water
Gas
Air
Vacuum
Nitrogen
Steam
Deionized Water
D. Green
Red
Blue
Orange
Yellow
Brown
Black
White
White
White
White
White
Black
White
White
Black
CW
HW
GAS
AIR
VAC
NIT
STM
DI
Oxygen
Compressed Air
Lt. Green
Orange
White
White
O2
CA
Vacuum
Hydrogen
Carbon Dioxide
Yellow
Lt. Blue
Pink
Blue
Black
Black
VAC
H2
CO2
Argon
Helium
Violet
Black
White
White
Ar
He
Special Gas
Lt. Blue
White
SG
Emergency Showers:
1.
Wall mounted emergency shower units shall have the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
L.
10" diameter stainless steel shower head with ceiling trim flange.
Rigid polished aluminum heavy duty pull rod.
Stainless steel activating arm.
1" IPS brass stay open ball valve.
30 GPM flow and 20" spray pattern of 60" above floor.
Provide stainless steel piping at all exposed positions
Basis of Design: Thermo-Scientific 33L29700.
Deck mounted eye washes
1.
Basis of Design: Water saver EW849. Coordinate with sink layout.
2.3 ELECTRICAL SERVICE FITTINGS
A.
Service Fittings, General: Provide UL-labeled units complying with Division 16
Sections, complete with metal housings, receptacles, terminals, switches, pilot lights,
device plates, and accessories and gaskets required for mounting on casework.
1.
Pedestal Type Fixtures: Cast aluminum box complete with cover plate(s) and
receptacle(s) or other devices as indicated. Fabricate units with sloped single
LABORATORY SERVICE FIXTURES
AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
UIUC - U12184
11 62 10 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
3.
4.
5.
face or double face, as indicated, and conceal mounting holes in base for
attaching to casework. Provide holes tapped for conduits and grounding screws.
Line Type Fixtures: Cast aluminum box with threaded holes for mounting on rigid
steel conduit, complete with cover plate(s) and receptacle(s) or other devices as
indicated.
Recessed Type Fixtures: Galvanized steel outlet box (size as required) complete
with cover plate(s) and receptacle(s) or other devices as indicated.
Cover Plates: Provide stainless steel Type 302/304 cover plates with formed and
beveled edges for outlets and devices. Cover plates for receptacles or other
devices on emergency circuits shall be finished red and engraved with the word
"Emergency" in red filled letters.
Finishes for Service Fixture Components: Finish pedestal and line type fixtures
and face plates as follows:
a.
Exposed surfaces of electrical boxes shall have a wrinkle black epoxy powder
coated finish. Face plates shall be satin (brushed) finish stainless steel.*
2.4 WIRES AND CABLES
A.
Furnish wire and cable for standard specifications established for such material and
construction by ASTM, ANSI, IPCEA and NEMA, where applicable. Furnish annealed
copper conductors of 98% conductivity, not less than NO. 12 AWG. Furnish stranded
conductors No. 12 AWG. NEC Type THW rated 75 deg C, 600 volts.
B.
Fume Hood Wiring: Each electrical device shall be wired separately with 2 #12 and 1
#12 ground wire in flexible ½" conduit to a junction box on top of fume hoods or on
outside face of the casework back panel (cover accessible from inside casework).
Furnish 18" of coiled slack wire pigtail in junction box for extension by Building Trades
Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FIXTURES
A.
Install in a precise manner in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Adjust
moving parts to operate freely without excessive bind.
B.
Provide all interconnecting conduit, wiring, and devices to junction box for final
connection to building systems by Electrical Trades Contractor.
3.2 REPAIRING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A.
Repairing: Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion
of installation.
B.
Cleaning: Clean shop-finished surfaces, touch-up as required, and remove or refinish
damaged or soiled areas, as acceptable to Architect.
C.
Protection: Advise Contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of installed
laboratory service fixtures from damage by work of other trades.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
11 62 10 - 7
LABORATORY SERVICE FIXTURES
AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
END OF SECTION 11 62 10
LABORATORY SERVICE FIXTURES
AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
UIUC - U12184
11 62 10 - 8
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 11 62 20 - LABORATORY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 BASE BID
A.
Work includes:
1.
General Contractor
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Glass drying racks.
Laboratory adjustable wall shelving.
Island and Fume Hood superstructure support frames (apparatus).
Exhaust snorkels.
Gas cylinder restraint straps and racks.
Unistrut framing.
Service drops
Canopy exhaust hoods
Gas manifold
Shelving
Equipment listed on Lab Equipment Schedule and not specified elsewhere.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Division 10, Section “Cubicles”
Division 11, Section 11610, "Fume Hoods".
Division 11, Section 11621, "Laboratory Service Fixtures and Safety Equipment".
Division 12, Section "Metal Laboratory Casework".
Division 12, Section "Wood Laboratory Casework" including epoxy countertops
and sinks.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Provide assemblies and systems capable of withstanding the
effects of earthquake motions determined according to the building code in effect for
this Project or ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures",
Section 9, "Earthquake Loads", whichever is more stringent.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
11 62 20- 1
LABORATORY ACCESSORIES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for manufactured items. Submit all contractor
supplied items listed on the “Lab Equipment Schedules” not specified below and in
other sections.
B.
Samples: Submit samples of the following:
1.
All metal finishes.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for laboratory accessory assemblies that are
factory and/or field assembled from manufactured components. Submit shop drawings
showing locations, materials, field measurements, connections and all details of
construction and installation. Coordinate with MEP work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Laboratory adjustable wall shelving.
Exhaust snorkel supports.
Stainless steel shelving.
Unistrut framing.
Curtain support framing.
Gas cylinder restraint straps and racks.
Canopy exhaust hoods
Glass drying racks.
Service drops
D. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing
agency, indicate compliance of laboratory casework finishes and countertops with
requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance.
E.
Qualification Data: Firms and/or persons specified shall demonstrate their capabilities
and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
F.
Contractor shall submit manufacturer's notarized certificate that products, adhesives,
paints, etc submitted and installed at project site do not contain asbestos or any other
banned product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
other than those listed below offering products may be incorporated into the Work
subject to approval by Architect.
2.2 MATERIALS
A.
Unless specified otherwise under an individual laboratory accessory, provide the
following materials.
LABORATORY ACCESSORIES
UIUC - U12184
11 62 20 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
1.
2.
3.
Metal: Commercial-quality, cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet, complying with ASTM
A 366 (ASTM A 366M); matte finish; suitable for exposed applications; and
stretcher leveled or roller leveled to stretcher-leveled flatness. Minimum 18 ga.
Stainless Steel: AISI Type 304 with No. 4 satin finish unless otherwise indicated.
Chemical-Resistant Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating,
apply manufacturer's standard 2-coat, chemical-resistant, baked-enamel finish
consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat with a minimum dry film
thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat and 2 mils (0.05 mm) for system.
2.3 GLASS DRYING RACKS
A.
Provide and install Glass Drying Racks as described here and as indicated on
drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings the size shall be:
B.
30" W x 30" H, unless otherwise noted.
C. Glass drying rack assemblies shall include the following components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Front Panel: 1" thick epoxy resin or 1" stainless steel with No. 4 finish.
Glassware Pegs: Replaceable stainless steel or solid white polypropylene with
glassware protector bases.
Drip Trough: Stainless steel drip trough with PVC drainage hose.
Finished Back Panels: Matching finish and material at front panel.
Provide all fittings, fasteners, bracing, brackets, etc., for installation illustrated on
drawings. Coordinate all reinforcing requirements for wall, frame or service drop
mounting.
2.4 LABORATORY ADJUSTABLE WALL SHELVING
A.
Fabricate and install adjustable wall shelving as described here and as indicated on
drawings. Provide the following types of adjustable shelving, in locations as indicated
on drawings.
1. 3/4” epoxy resin shelves supported by 6” high end closure shelf brackets
supported by double slotted shelf standards.
2. Stainless steel shelves supported by 6” high end closure shelf brackets supported
by double slotted shelf standards.
B.
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, locations of reinforcement, and other conditions affecting performance of
adjustable shelving installation.
C. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves.
Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated. Provide
continuous blocking behind all shelving.
D. Shelves shall deflect no more then 1/8” in 4 feet with 60 psf load.
2.5 EXHAUST SNORKELS
A.
Provide and install exhaust snorkels as specified herein and as indicated on the
drawings.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
11 62 20- 3
LABORATORY ACCESSORIES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Secure snorkel assemblies to unistrut framing secured to building structure above
using manufacturer's standard brackets as detailed on drawings. Provide and install
all nuts, bolts, fittings and accessories required.
C. The design standard for this project is the Nederman Inc., Fume Extractor Arms.
2.6 GAS CYLINDER RESTRAINT RACKS AND STRAPS
A.
Fabricate and install gas cylinder storage racks in locations as indicated and detailed
on drawings.
B.
Fabricate and install with Unistrut components complete with all nuts, bolts, fittings,
and accessories indicated and required.
C. Racks shall be shop prime painted with corrosion resisting primer and receive shop
applied finish coatings.
D. The Basis of Design standard for cylinder restraint straps and buckles are:
1. Straps - McMaster Carr #9499 R11.
2. Quick Disconnect Buckles - McMaster Carr #9499 R14.
E.
Install cylinder restraint racks plumb, level and square to walls unless otherwise
indicated on drawings. Brace rack assemblies to walls to prevent sway.
2.7 UNISTRUT FRAMING
A.
Provide, fabricate and install metal, FRP and stainless steel Unistrut framing as
detailed and indicated on drawings. See equipment matrix for more information. See
various service drops and storage grids for more information.
2.8 SERVICE DROPS
A.
Fabricate and install wood faced service drops in configurations as detailed on
drawings consisting of removable and fixed panels. Plastic laminate shall match that
for shelving.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Removable and fixed service drop panels are to fit together flush showing a
minimum joint where they join.
Removable access panels for all service drops are to have concealed-to-view
pins, catches, clips, strikes, etc., that allow removal of panel with an upward
motion. Provide exposed countersunk washers and oval head Stainless Steel
screws.
Fabricate and install service drops 1-inch (25.4 mm) lower than the bottom of light
fixture line or ceiling if applicable to facilitate removal of access panel in an
upward motion.
All panels are to interlock with benchtop backsplashes so as the face of the
backsplash and service drop panel are flush, unless otherwise detailed on
drawings.
Fixed service drop panels of boards shall be fastened to the wall or support
unistrut -- whichever is applicable. Fixed panels shall be fitted with internal
horizontal unistrut spaced vertically at 24" O/C to facilitate the internal fastening
and support of mechanical piping and ductwork
LABORATORY ACCESSORIES
UIUC - U12184
11 62 20 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Install service drops plumb, level and true.
2.9 SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING
A.
Provide, fabricate and install slotted metal channel framing as detailed and indicated
on drawings.
B.
The following lists slotted channel framing integral with the installation of laboratory
casework, fume hoods, service fittings and accessories.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Overhead service carriers.
Pipe and service drop supports.
Support assembly for shelving.
Suspended equipment supports.
Miscellaneous structures and supports as detailed on drawings.
2.10 CANOPY EXHAUST HOODS
A.
Hoods shall be designed and fabricated of stainless steel and of gauges indicated. All
exposed corners are to be welded and ground smooth, and finished to match adjacent
surfaces.
B.
Hoods shall be supported as detailed on Drawings: Suspended hoods shall be hung
by 3/8-inch steel rods attached to steel hanger clips in hood and to hanger brackets
attached to building structure above ceilings; and at sides abutting walls, secure to
walls with stainless steel fasteners.
C. Provide side dress-up panels on sides not abutting walls.
D. Install canopy hoods plumb, level and square to walls unless otherwise indicated on
drawings. Position canopy hoods over equipment or benchtops to best facilitate the
removal of odors, heat, steam, etc.
E.
Provide damper control on hard edge.
2.11 GAS MANIFOLDS
A.
Stainless steel wall mounted regulator
1.
B.
3-foot (91cm) flex hose and integral check valve with right side cylinder set-up,
mounting brackets, pressure regulator, NFPA label and mounting plate, and CGA
handles.
Manufacturer/Basis of Design: Mathieson Trigas, Model 54 series
C. Manifolds shall be hard piped to fume hoods.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION AND CLEANING
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
11 62 20- 5
LABORATORY ACCESSORIES
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
A.
Install accessories according to approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
General: Install all items plumb, level, properly aligned, rigid, and securely anchored to
building and casework components. Provide blocking behind wall at all wall mounted
racks, wall shelving, display strips and all other wall mounted items.
C. Repair, remove or replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.
D. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or
soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
END OF SECTION 11 62 20
LABORATORY ACCESSORIES
UIUC - U12184
11 62 20 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 12 35 10 - METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
Work includes:
1.
General Contractor
a. Standard stainless steel and/or painted steel laboratory casework and
shelving.
b. Painted and/or stainless steel acid and solvent storage cabinets.
1.2
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Structural Performance: Provide metal laboratory casework capable of withstanding
the following loads without permanent deformation, excessive deflection, or binding of
drawers and doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
Division 9 Sections for flooring with coved bases for resilient base or epoxy floor
base applied to metal laboratory casework.
Division 11 Section 11610 "Laboratory Fume Hoods" for fume hoods.
Division 11 Section 11621, "Laboratory Service Fixtures and Safety Equipment".
Division 11, Section 11622, "Laboratory Accessories", for benchtops, sinks,
service drops, drying racks, adjustable shelving, cylinder restraints, etc.
Division 12, Section “Wood Laboratory Casework” for related work including
countertops and hardware.
Shelves of Base, Wall, and Storage Cabinets: 100 lb (45 kg).
Drawers: 150 lb (68 kg).
Wall Cabinets: 75 lb/ft. (112 kg/m).
Suspended-Base Cabinets: 75 lb/ft. (112 kg/m).
Floor-Supported Base Cabinets and Tabletops: 75 lb/ft. (112 kg/m) within
cabinets, 50-lb/ft. (74-kg/m) countertop, plus 75 lb/ft. (112 kg/m) on countertop.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B.
Shop Drawings: For metal laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Indicate locations of blocking and other supports required for installing casework.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
12 35 10 - 1
METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
3.
4.
5.
Indicate locations and types of service fittings, together with associated service
supply connection required.
Include details of utility spaces showing supports for conduits and piping.
Show adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components, and other
laboratory equipment. Indicate clearances from above items.
Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment, fume hoods and
laboratory accessories specified in other Sections.
C.
Samples for Verification: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square samples for each type of finish,
including top material.
D.
Furnish and install a mock-up laboratory consisting of the following items as indicated
on drawings. Each component of the mock-up shall be of the type, finish and color
specified. The mock-up laboratory shall be installed at a location on the project site as
determined by the Owner and Architect. The components of the mock-up can be
reused in the project if acceptable and deemed in good condition by the Owner and
Architect.
1.
2.
3.
M##B01 - included epoxy top.
W##G32.
Open full height shelf.
E.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
F.
Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing
agency, indicate compliance of laboratory casework finishes and countertops with
requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance.
G.
Coordinate shop drawings with other work involved.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer shall identify and designate a full time factory representative for on-site
supervision and coordination during the installation of laboratory casework and all
components.
B.
Single Source Responsibility: Provide laboratory casework with tops, sinks,
accessories, fume hoods and service fixtures, manufactured or furnished by same
laboratory furniture company for single responsibility.
C.
Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes and configurations of casework.
Manufacturers' of casework of similar sizes, similar door and drawer configurations,
and complying with the Specifications may be considered.
1.6
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Do not deliver laboratory casework until painting, utility roughing-in, and similar
operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate casework have been completed in
installation areas. If casework must be stored in other than installation areas, store
only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project
Conditions" Article below.
METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
12 35 10 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation.
Keep covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install laboratory casework until building is
enclosed, wet-work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels through remainder of
construction period.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of metal framing, reinforcement and sheet metal
fastening grounds in gypsum board assemblies for support of metal laboratory
casework.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish to Owner complete touchup kit for each type and color of laboratory casework
provided. Include fillers and polishes and other materials necessary to perform
permanent repairs to damaged casework finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
Metal Laboratory Casework:
a. Thermo Scientific - Hamilton
b. Kewaunee Scientific Corp.; Laboratory Division.
c. Mott Manufacturing
B.
2.2
A.
Note: Coordinate manufacturer requirements with wood casework and top
manufacturer.
METAL CABINET AND TABLE MATERIALS
Metal:
1.
2.
B.
Cold-rolled, stainless steel steel (Type 304 sheet, complying with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; #4 mill finish; suitable for exposed applications.
Metal: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.
Nominal Metal Thickness:
1.
20 gauge. Solid door interior panels, drawer fronts, scribing strips, filler panels,
enclosures, drawer bodies, shelves, security panels and sloping tops.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
12 35 10 - 3
METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
18 gauge: Case tops, ends, bottoms, bases, backs, vertical posts, uprights,
glazed door members, door exterior panels and access panels.
16 gauge: Top front rails, top rear gussets, intermediate horizontal rails, table legs
and frames, leg rails and stretchers.
14 gauge: Drawer suspensions, door and case hinge reinforcements and front
corner reinforcements.
11 gauge: Table leg corner brackets and gussets for leveling screws.
AUXILIARY CABINET MATERIALS
A.
Acid Storage-Cabinet Lining: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, reinforced molded polyethylene
or polypropylene.
B.
Glass for Glazed Doors: Heat treated clear float glass complying with ASTM C 1048,
Type I, Class 1, Quality-Q3; not less than 3.0 mm thick.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
General: Complete assembly and finish work at point of manufacture. Perform
assembly on precision jigs to provide units which are square; fully reinforced with
angles, gussets, and channels; and integrally framed and welded to form a dirt and
vermin-retardant enclosure. Where applicable, reinforce base cabinets for sink
support. Maintain uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to 3/32
inch (1.5 to 2.4 mm).
B.
Fabricate units on precision dies for interchangeability of like-size drawers, doors, and
similar parts.
C.
Flush Doors: Outer and inner pans formed and telescoped into box formation, with
channel reinforcements full height on center of each pan. Fill doors solid with
noncombustible, sound-deadening material.
D.
Glazed Doors: Hollow-metal stiles and rails of similar construction as flush doors, with
glass held in resilient channels or gasket material.
E.
Exposed sides of cabinets shall be fabricated from the same material and with the
same finish as cabinet fronts.
F.
Hinged Doors: Mortise at flanges for hinges and reinforce with angles, welded inside
inner pans at hinge edge.
G.
Drawers: Assemble fronts from telescoping outer and inner pans, designed to
eliminate raw edge of steel at top. Fabricate sides, back, and bottom of one piece with
rolled or formed top of sides for stiffening and comfortable grasp for drawer removal.
Weld drawer front to sides, back, and bottom to form a single, integral unit. Provide
drawers with rubber bumpers, runners, and positive stops to prevent metal-to-metal
contact or accidental removal.
H.
Adjustable Shelves: Front, back, and ends formed down with returned lip at front and
back.
METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
12 35 10 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
I.
Toe Space: Provide an adjustable height metal toe space, fully enclosed, adjustable in
height from a minimum 4" to a maximum 6" high by 3 inches (75 mm) deep, with no
open gaps or pockets. The adjustable height shall provide backing for the resilient
base in the event of varying floor elevations.
J.
Table Legs: Not less than 4-inch- (50-mm-) square, electrically welded tubing. Provide
leg stretchers where necessary to comply with structural performance requirements.
Weld or bolt leg stretchers to legs and cross-stretchers. Securely bolt legs to table
aprons. Provide leveling device welded to bottom of each leg.
K.
Leg Shoes: Rubber, black, open-bottom type.
L.
Utilities: Provide space, cutouts, and holes for pipes, ductwork, conduits, and fittings in
cabinet bodies to accommodate utility services and their support-strut assemblies.
M.
Service Chase Framing: Manufacturer's standard steel framing units consisting of 2
cold-rolled C-channel uprights, not less than 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) square by 0.10 inch
(2.5 mm) thick, connected together at the top and bottom by U-shaped brackets made
from 1-1/4-by-1/4-inch (32-by-6-mm) flat bars. Framing units may be made by welding
C-channel material specified for uprights into rectangular frames instead of using Ushaped brackets.
N.
Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close space between cabinets and walls, ceilings,
and indicated equipment including ends of utility chases. Fabricate from the same
material and with the same finish as cabinets. Hem exposed edges.
2.5
FINISH FOR METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
A.
General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after assembling. Prepare,
treat, and finish components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners
before assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish concealed surfaces same as exposed
surfaces.
B.
Preparation: After assembly, clean surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, and other
contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating
to be applied over it.
C.
Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Provide metal laboratory
casework with finish system complying with the following requirements for chemical
and physical resistance:
1.
Chemical Resistance: Capable of withstanding application of not less than 5 drops
(0.25 mL) of the following reagents applied to finish surface; covered with a watch
glass for 60 minutes, rinsed, and dried; with no permanent change in gloss, color,
film hardness, adhesion, or film protection.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Acetic acid (98 percent).
Hydrochloric acid (37 percent).
Nitric acid (25 percent).
Phosphoric acid (75 percent).
Sulfuric acid (85 percent).
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
12 35 10 - 5
METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
2.
Acetone.
Benzene.
Carbon tetrachloride.
Ethyl acetate.
Ethyl alcohol.
Ethyl ether.
Formaldehyde (37 percent).
Furfural.
Methyl ethyl ketone.
Phenol (85 percent).
Toluene.
Xylene.
Ammonium hydroxide (28 percent).
Potassium hydroxide (40 percent).
Sodium carbonate (saturated).
Sodium chloride (saturated).
Sodium hydroxide (25 percent)
Sodium sulfide (saturated).
Zinc chloride (saturated).
Moisture Resistance: No visible effect when exposed to the following:
a. Hot water at a temperature of 190 to 205 deg F (88 to 96 deg C), trickled down
the surface at a 45-degree angle for 5 minutes.
b. Constant moisture using a 2-by-3-by-1-inch (51-by-76-by-25-mm) cellulose
sponge, soaked with water, in contact with surface for 100 hours.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
A.
2.7
Cold Crack: No effect when subjected to 10 cycles of temperature change from 20
deg F (minus 7 deg C) for 60 minutes to 125 deg F (52 deg C) for 60 minutes.
Adhesion and Flexibility: No peeling or cracking or exposure of metal when metal
is bent 180 degrees over a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter mandrel.
Provide minimum 40 color choices.
CASEWORK HARDWARE
Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard satin-finish, stainless steel,
commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware complying with requirements indicated for
each type. All hardware shall match that provided and specified in Section 12 35 60,
unless noted otherwise.
COUNTERTOPS, TABLE TOPS, AND SHELVES
A.
Countertops, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of
defects. Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly rounded. Provide
front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm), with continuous drip groove on underside
1/2 inch (13 mm) from edge.
B.
Sinks, General: Provide sizes indicated.
1.
Outlets: Provide with strainers and tailpieces, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), unless
otherwise indicated.
METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
12 35 10 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
2.
3.
4.
C.
Overflows: Where indicated, provide overflow of standard beehive or open-top
design with separate strainer. Height 2 inches (50 mm) less than sink depth.
Provide in same material as strainer.
Shelf Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm) for spans up to 36".
Finish: Match Architect's sample.
Stainless Steel Countertops:
1.
Made from 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet, ASTM A 666, Type
302 or Type 304 with No. 4 satin finish, and complying with the following
requirements:
a. Weld shop-made joints, and grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform,
directional, textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. When
polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
b. Where field-made joints are required, provide hairline butt-joints, mechanically
bolted through continuous channels welded to underside at edges of joined
ends. Keep field jointing to a minimum. Apply reinforcing channels to
underside of top where necessary to insure rigidity without deflection.
c. Extend top down to provide a 1-inch (25-mm) thickness and a ½-inch (13-mm)
return flange under frame. Sound deaden entire undersurface with heavy-build
mastic coating. Form backsplash coved to and integral with top surface.
d. Provide raised marine edge around perimeter of tops containing sinks; pitch 2
ways to sink to provide drainage without channeling or grooving.
e. Where stainless-steel sinks or cup sinks occur in stainless-steel tops, factory
weld into one integral unit, grind welds smooth, polish, passivate, and rinse.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, location of reinforcement, and other conditions affecting performance of
metal laboratory casework installation.
1.
3.2
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
CASEWORK INSTALLATION
A.
Install plumb, level, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where
laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate
fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
B.
Utility-Space Framing: Secure to floor with 2 fasteners at each frame. Fasten to
partition framing, wood blocking, or metal reinforcements in partitions and to base
cabinets.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
12 35 10 - 7
METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
C.
Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, plumb, and level. Adjust subtops within 1/16
inch (1.5 mm) of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to utility-space framing, partition
framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions with fasteners spaced 24 inches
(600 mm) o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.
Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
1.
Where base cabinets are not installed adjacent to walls, fasten to floor at toe
space with concealed fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Secure sides of
cabinets to floor, where they do not adjoin other cabinets, with not less than 2
fasteners.
D.
Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, plumb, and level. Adjust fronts and bottoms
within 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition
framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back,
near top, at not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Align similar adjoining doors to a
tolerance of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
E.
Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises, unless
otherwise indicated. Adjust and align hardware so moving parts operate freely and
contact points meet accurately. Allow for final adjustment after installation.
F.
Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or
bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
G.
Install clear silicone sealant ASTM C920, Class 25, solvent curing, at joints between
casework and walls, counters and walls and casework and floor.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A.
Install accessories according to approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written
instructions. Coordinate locations and installation at all laboratory accessories
specified in Section 11 62 2.
B.
Securely fasten all casework, service chase frames, shelving, to metal fastening
grounds or walls.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.
B.
Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or
soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
C.
Protection: Provide 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering
over countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at minimum of 48 inches
(1200 mm) o.c.
END OF SECTION 12 35 10
METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
12 35 10 - 8
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 12 35 60 - WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
BASE BID
The work includes:
1.
General Contractor
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.2
Wood-faced laboratory casework.
Laboratory utility-space framing.
Laboratory countertops
Wood bases under fume hoods
RELATED WORK
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
A.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring laboratory
casework.
Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base
applied to wood laboratory casework.
Division 11 Section "Laboratory Fume Hoods" for fume hoods.
Division 11 Section "Laboratory Service Fixtures and Safety Equipment".
Division 11 Section "Laboratory Accessories" for benchtops, sinks, service drops,
drying racks, adjustable shelving, cylinder restraints, etc.
Division 12 Section "Metal Laboratory Casework".
DEFINITIONS
Exposed Portions of Casework: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed,
including bottoms of cabinets more than 36 inches (1200 mm) above floor, and visible
surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors.
1.
Ends of cabinets, including those installed directly against walls or other
cabinets, shall be considered exposed.
B.
Semi-exposed Portions of Casework: Surfaces behind opaque doors, such as interiors
of cabinets, shelves, dividers, interiors and sides of drawers, and interior faces of
doors. Tops of cases 78 inches (1980 mm) or more above floor are defined as semiexposed.
C.
Concealed portions of casework include sleepers, web frames, dust panels, and other
surfaces not usually visible after installation.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
12 35 60 - 1
WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B.
Shop Drawings: For wood laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Indicate locations of blocking and other supports required for installing casework.
Indicate locations and types of service fittings, together with associated service
supply connection required.
Include details of utility spaces showing supports for conduits and piping.
Show adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components, and other
laboratory equipment. Indicate clearances from above items.
Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment, fume hoods, and
laboratory accessories specified in other Sections.
C.
Samples for Verification: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square samples for each type of finish,
including top material.
D.
Furnish and install a mock-up laboratory consisting of items as indicated on drawings.
Provide all items as indicated on drawings. Each component of the mock-up shall be
of the type, finish and color specified. The mock-up laboratory shall be installed either
at the manufacturer's facility or at a location on the project site as determined by the
Owner and Architect. The components of the mock-up can be reused in the project if
acceptable and deemed in good condition by the Owner and Architect.
E.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
F.
Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing
agency, indicate compliance of laboratory casework finishes and countertops with
requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance.
G.
Coordinate shop drawings with other work involved.
H.
Mockups and Samples for Verification: Provide full-size mockups for on-site review.
Do not proceed with fabrication of other casework items until mockups and samples
are approved. Unless otherwise directed, approved full-size mockups and samples
may become part of the completed Work, if in an undisturbed condition at time of
Substantial Completion. Notify Architect of their exact locations. If not incorporated
into the Work, retain acceptable full-size Samples at Project site and remove when
directed by Architect.
1.
2.
3.
Full-size, finished base cabinets complete with hardware, doors, drawers,
countertops and sink, and service chases at locations indicated on drawing.
Provide 1 mockup of B##S02 complete with sink, top, backsplash, utility fittings
and waste can.
Full-size, finished wall cabinets W#R02, W#G03.
6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples for each type of countertop material.
WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
12 35 60 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
4.
5.
6.
1.5
One of each service fitting specified, complete with accessories and specified
finish.
One of each type of sink and accessory item specified.
One of each type of hardware item specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer shall identify and designate a full time factory representative for on-site
supervision and coordination during the installation of laboratory casework and all
components.
B.
Single Source Responsibility: Provide laboratory casework with tops, sinks, and
service fixtures, manufactured or furnished by same laboratory furniture company for
single responsibility.
C.
Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, configurations, and finish material of
casework. Manufacturers' casework of similar sizes, similar door and drawer
configurations, same finish material, and complying with the Specifications may be
considered.
D.
Flammable Liquid Storage: Where cabinets are indicated for solvent or flammable
liquid storage, provide units that are listed and labeled as complying with the
requirements of NFPA 30 for design, construction, and capacity of storage cabinets by
UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Do not deliver laboratory casework until painting, utility roughing-in, and similar
operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate casework have been completed in
installation areas. If casework must be stored in other than installation areas, store
only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project
Conditions" Article below.
B.
Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation.
Keep covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install laboratory casework until building is
enclosed, wet-work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels through remainder of
construction period.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of metal framing, reinforcement, and sheet metal
fastening grounds in gypsum board assemblies for support of wood laboratory
casework.
EXTRA MATERIALS
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
12 35 60 - 3
WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
A.
Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and finish of laboratory casework provided.
Include scratch fillers, stains, finishes, and other materials necessary to perform
permanent repairs to damaged casework finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
Wood-Faced Laboratory Casework:
a. Thermo Scientific - Hamilton
b. Kewaunee Scientific Corp.; Laboratory Division.
c. Mott Manufacturing
2.2
A.
COUNTERTOP, TABLETOP AND SINK MATERIALS
Epoxy: Factory-molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, nonspecular
finish.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Physical Properties:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi (70 MPa).
Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi (1400 MPa).
Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100.
Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent.
Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F (127 deg C).
Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following ratings when
tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:
a.
b.
2.3
Durcon Company (The)
Epoxyn Products
Laboratory Tops, Inc.
No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28
percent), benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate,
ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol,
sulfuric acid (60 percent), and toluene.
Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50
percent).
4.
Color: Black Onyx.
5.
See Section 11 62 20 for additional requirements.
MATERIALS - WOOD
WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
12 35 60 - 4
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
A.
Exposed Materials: Comply with the following:
1.
Exposed Wood: Do not use 2 adjacent exposed faces that are noticeably
dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character markings.
a.
2.
3.
B.
Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber matching selected species, free of defects,
selected for compatible grain and color and kiln dried to 7 percent moisture
content.
Plywood: Hardwood plywood of species indicated, selected for compatible color
and grain. HPVA HP-1, Grade AA faces at least 1/50 inch (0.5 mm) thick and
Grade J crossbands. Edgeband exposed edges with minimum 1/8-inch- (3-mm-)
thick, solid-wood edging of the same species as face veneer.
Semi-exposed Materials: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
C.
Wood Species: Maple, stain to match architects sample.
Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects
and kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. Any hardwood species similar in
color and grain to exposed portions.
Plywood: Hardwood plywood of any species similar in color and grain to
exposed portions. HPVA HP-1, Grade C faces and Grade J crossbands. Semiexposed backs of plywood with exposed faces shall be the same species as
faces.
Concealed Materials: Comply with the following:
1.
Solid Wood or Plywood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects
affecting strength or utility. Hardwood and softwood lumber kiln dried to 7 and 12
percent moisture content, respectively. Concealed backs of plywood with
exposed or semi-exposed faces shall be the same species as faces.
D.
Acid Storage-Cabinet Lining: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, fiber cement board complying
with ASTM C 1186.
E.
Clear Tempered Glass for Glazed Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I,
Class 1, Quality q3, 5.5 mm thick. - OR -
F.
Clear Laminated Safety Glass for Doors: ASTM C 1172, Kind LT; Kind FT, Condition
A, Type I, Class I, Quality q3 lites with clear, polyvinyl butyryl interlayer.
2.4
A.
FABRICATION
Construction: Provide wood-faced laboratory casework of the following minimum
construction:
1.
2.
Bottoms and ends of cabinets, shelves, and tops of wall cabinets and tall
cabinets: 3/4-inch (19-mm) plywood.
Top frames of base cabinets: 1”-by-3-inch (19-by-51-mm) solid hardwood with
mortise and tenon or doweled connections, glued and pinned or screwed.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
12 35 60 - 5
WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Backs of cabinets: 3/4-inch (19-mm) plywood where exposed, 1/4-inch (6.4-mm)
hardboard dadoed into sides, bottoms, and tops where not exposed.
Drawer fronts (separately applied): 3/4-inch (19-mm) plywood screw applied to
drawer body assembly.
Drawer bodies: 1/2-inch (13-mm) solid wood matching species of face veneer or
½" 9 ply Baltic birch plywood, with lock joints and dado to capture drawer bottom.
Drawer bottoms: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) veneer core hardwood plywood laminate
and backed, glued into dado of drawer body.
Doors 48 inches (1220 mm) or less in height: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick with 1/8"
thick solid hardwood edging, of same species as face veneer.
Doors more than 48 inches (1220 mm) in height: 1-1/8 inch (27 mm) thick with
solid hardwood stiles and rails, honeycomb cores, and hardwood face veneers
and crossbands.
Stiles and rails of glazed doors: 1-1/16-by-3-inch (27-by-76-mm) solid hardwood
with mortise and tenon or doweled connections, glued and screwed.
Matched vertical grain on aprons, door and drawer fronts.
Toe Space: Provide a fully encased toe space; 4" high by 3" deep with no gaps
or pockets.
Table Legs: 2" x 2" solid wood. Species to match cabinets.
Cabinet Shelves: ¾" plywood matching species and providing minimum 65 lb.
rating for any width of cabinet.
Pull-out shelves: Constructed same as drawer boxes with solid wood applied
front, set back behind doors. Block out slides to clear door hardware at 90 deg.
open.
B.
Table Leg Shoes: Rubber, black, open-bottom type.
C.
Service Chase Framing: Manufacturer's standard steel framing units consisting of 2
cold-rolled C-channel uprights, not less than 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) square by 0.10 inch
(2.5 mm) thick, connected together at the top and bottom by U-shaped brackets made
from 1-1/4-by-1/4-inch (32-by-6-mm) flat bars. Framing units may be made by welding
C-channel material specified for uprights into rectangular frames instead of using Ushaped brackets.
D.
Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close space between cabinets and walls, ceilings,
and indicated equipment, including ends of utility chases. Fabricate from the same
material and with the same finish as cabinets.
E.
All exposed cabinet sides shall be constructed and finished to match cabinet fronts.
2.5
FINISH FOR WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
A.
Preparation: Machine sand lumber and plywood for casework construction before
assembling. Sand edges of doors and drawer fronts and molded shapes with profileedge sander. Hand sand casework after assembling for uniform smoothness at least
equivalent to that produced by 220 grit sanding and without machine marks, cross
sanding, or other surface blemishes.
B.
Staining: Remove fibers and dust with compressed air or tack cloths and apply washcoat sealer and stain to exposed and semi-exposed surfaces as required to provide
uniform, color-matching, approved samples.
WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
12 35 60 - 6
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
C.
Chemical-Resistant Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard 2-coat, chemical-resistant,
baked, clear finish consisting of a thermosetting catalyzed sealer and a thermosetting
catalyzed conversion varnish. Hand sand and wipe clean between applying sealer and
topcoat. Topcoat may be omitted on fully concealed surfaces. System shall meet
requirements below.
D.
Chemical and Physical Resistance of Wood Finish System: Provide wood laboratory
casework with finish system complying with the following requirements for chemical
and physical resistance:
1.
Chemical Resistance: Capable of withstanding application of not less than 5
drops (0.25 mL) of the following reagents applied to finish surface; covered with a
watch glass for 60 minutes, rinsed, and dried; with no permanent change in
gloss, color, film hardness, adhesion, or film protection.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
2.
Moisture Resistance: No visible effect when exposed to the following:
a.
b.
2.6
A.
Acetic acid (98 percent).
Hydrochloric acid (37 percent).
Nitric acid (10 percent).
Phosphoric acid (75 percent).
Sulfuric acid (25 percent).
Acetone.
Benzene.
Carbon tetrachloride.
Ethyl acetate.
Ethyl alcohol.
Ethyl ether.
Formaldehyde (37 percent).
Methyl ethyl ketone.
Toluene.
Xylene.
Ammonium hydroxide (28 percent).
Potassium hydroxide (40 percent).
Sodium carbonate (saturated).
Sodium chloride (saturated).
Sodium hydroxide (25 percent)
Hot water at a temperature of 190 to 205 deg F (88 to 96 deg C), trickled
down the surface at a 45-degree angle for 5 minutes.
Constant moisture using a 2-by-3-by-1-inch (51-by-76-by-25-mm) cellulose
sponge, soaked with water, in contact with surface for 100 hours.
CASEWORK HARDWARE
Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard satin-finish, stainless steel,
commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware complying with requirements indicated for
each type.
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
12 35 60 - 7
WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Hinges: Solid stainless-steel, 5-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA 156.9, Grade 1,
with antifriction bearings and rounded tips. Provide 2 for doors less than 48 inches
(1200 mm) high and 3 for doors more than 48 inches (1200 mm) high.
C.
Pulls: Solid stainless steel, fastened from back with 2 screws. For sliding doors,
provide stainless-steel or chrome-plated recessed flush pulls. Provide 2 pulls for
drawers more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide. Design: 1-1/2” x 4” wire pulls
D.
Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring catch or dual, self-aligning, permanent magnet
catch. Provide 2 catches on doors more than 48 inches (1200 mm) high.
E.
Drawer and Tray Slides: Side mounted epoxy coated steel, self closing BHMA A156,
Type B05091. Provide Grade 1 HD-100 for drawers not more than 6” high and 24”
wide; provide Grade 1 HD-200 elsewhere. Drawer boxes 4" deep or less, shall be
Accuride 3832 Series, epoxy coated/full extension, 100 lbs. dynamic load capacity.
Drawer boxes over 4" deep shall be Accuride 4034 Series, full extension/epoxy coated,
150 lb. dynamic load capacity.
F.
Label Holders: Stainless steel, sized to receive standard label cards approximately 1
by 2 inches (25 by 51 mm), attached with screws or brads.
1.
G.
Provide at each drawer or door
Drawer and Cupboard Locks: Cylindrical type, 5-pin tumbler and cam, brass with
chrome-plated finish, complying with BHMA A156.11, Grade 1.
1.
2.
3.
Provide minimum of 2 keys per lock and 6 master keys.
Provide at all doors and drawers.
Coordinate keying with Owner.
H.
Sliding-Door Hardware Sets: Manufacturer's standard, stainless steel, to suit type and
size of sliding-door units.
I.
Casters: Full Swivel, all- stainless steel ball bearing casters. Minimum capacity of 300
Lbs. Provide casters with 4” x 1-1/4” lockable soft grey (non-marking) rubber wheels.
Locks must be accessible from toe space and not extend beyond edge of toe space.
J.
Grommets:
1.
Horizontal Surfaces: 3” diameter matte black plastic with flip top slotted cover.
2.
Vertical Surfaces: 3” diameter matte black plastic with no cover.
K.
Adjustable Shelf Supports: Mortise-type steel standards and steel shelf rests, with
epoxy powder-coated finish, complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04071 and
B04091.
2.7
A.
COUNTERTOPS, TABLE TOPS, SHELVES, TROUGHS, AND SINKS
Countertops, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of
defects. Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly rounded. Provide
front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm), with continuous drip groove on underside
1/2 inch (13 mm) from edge. See Section 11 62 20 for epoxy material requirements.
WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
12 35 60 - 8
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Sinks, General: Provide sizes indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Outlets: Provide with strainers and tailpieces, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), unless
otherwise indicated,
Overflows: Where indicated, provide overflow of standard beehive or open-top
design with separate strainer. Height 2 inches (50 mm) less than sink depth.
Provide in same material as strainer.
Epoxy Countertops, Table Tops and Sinks:
1.
Countertop Fabrication: Fabricate with factory cutouts for sinks, holes for service
fittings, grommets, and accessories, and with butt joints assembled with epoxy
adhesive and concealed metal splines.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Table-Top Fabrication:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Table-Top Configuration: Flat, 1 inch (25 mm) thick with drip groove at
perimeter.
Table-Top Construction: Uniform throughout full thickness.
Edges and Corners: 1/4-inch (6.3 mm) radius top edge with blended radius
corners.
Sink Fabrication: Molded in 1 piece with smooth surfaces, coved corners, and
bottom sloped to outlet; 1/2-inch (13-mm) minimum thickness.
a.
b.
c.
4.
Countertop Configuration: Flat, 1 inch (25 mm) thick, with rounded edge
and corners, and with drip groove and applied backsplash.
Countertop Construction: Uniform throughout full thickness.
Indicate seam locations or shop drawings.
Provide plastic grommet inserts at grommet locations.
Edges and Corners: 1/4-inch (6.3 mm) radius top edge with blended radius
corners.’
Provide with polypropylene strainers and tailpieces.
Provide epoxy drop-in and epoxy undermount sink.
Provide manufacturer's recommended adjustable support system for tableand cabinet-type installations.
Backsplashes: Field-applied bonded to countertops. Include top-mounted end
curb where work surfaces abut walls, fume hoods and locations indicated on
drawings.
a.
b.
c.
Provide curved backsplashes at columns where indicated.
Size: 4-inch (101.6 mm) high, same thickness as countertop.
Color: Same as countertop.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
12 35 60 - 9
WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, location of reinforcement, and other conditions affecting performance of
wood laboratory casework installation.
1.
3.2
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
CASEWORK INSTALLATION
A.
Install plumb, level, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where
laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate
fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
B.
Utility-Space Framing: Secure to floor with 2 fasteners at each frame. Fasten to
partition framing, wood blocking, or metal reinforcements in partitions and to base
cabinets.
C.
Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, plumb, and level. Adjust subtops within 1/16
inch (1.5 mm) of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to utility-space framing, partition
framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions with fasteners spaced 24 inches
(600 mm) o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.
Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
1.
2.
Where base cabinets are not installed adjacent to walls, fasten to floor at toe
space with concealed fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Secure sides of
cabinets to floor, where they do not adjoin other cabinets, with not less than 2
fasteners.
Finish flooring shall extend under cabinets to wall.
D.
Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, plumb, and level. Adjust fronts and bottoms
within 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition
framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back,
near top, at not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Align similar adjoining doors to a
tolerance of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
E.
Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises, unless
otherwise indicated. Adjust and align hardware so moving parts operate freely and
contact points meet accurately. Allow for final adjustment after installation.
F.
Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or
bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
G.
Provide clear silicone sealant, ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25 between casework
and walls and floors, counters and walls, counters and backsplashes, and
backsplashes and all other construction.
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
Install accessories according to approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written
instructions. Coordinate locations and installation of all laboratory accessories
specified in Section 11 62 2.
WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
12 35 60 - 10
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
B.
Securely fasten all casework service chase frames, and shelving to metal fastening
grounds or reinforcements in partitions.
C.
Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves.
Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.
B.
Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or
soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
C.
Protection: Provide 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering
over countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at minimum of 48 inches
(1200 mm) o.c.
END OF SECTION 12 35 60
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
12 35 60 - 11
WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
UIUC - U12184
12 35 60 - 12
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
SECTION 12 51 00 – FURNITURE
PART 1 1.1
A.
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDES
Base Bid
1.
General Contractor to provide the following furniture with IPHEC discount:
a.
b.
1.2
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of furniture indicated.
1.
B.
2.
1.3
A.
Include installation methods for each type of substrate.
Samples for Verification: For the following products, showing the full range of color,
texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to
be used for the Work.
1.
C.
Armless task stool with glides and foot ring.
Serpentine bench seating
Fabric: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Sample from dye lot to be used for the Work.
Mark face of fabric.
Exposed Finishes: 3-inch- (75-mm-) square Samples.
Maintenance Data: For furniture and equipment to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
FURNITURE
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated for
each designation in the Furniture Schedule at the end of Part 3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
12 51 00 - 1
FURNITURE
UIUC - U12184
ISSUED FOR BID
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine areas, with Installer present, for conditions affecting furniture performance.
1.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ADJUSTING
Adjust components and accessories so classroom furniture operates properly according to manufacturer's written instructions.
FURNITURE SCHEDULE
Furniture F-2: Where furniture of this designation is indicated, provide products complying with one of the following:
1.
Manufacturer: KI
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Manufacturer: Vanerum Stelter
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Manufacturer's Product Designation: TASPNA
Description: Torsion Air Stool on glides, armless, with foot ring.
Seat Height: 18”- 23”
Overall Width: 26.5”
Overall Depth: 26.5”
Finish Designation: Black seat upholstery, back mesh, base.
Source: John Leachman
Manufacturer's Product Designation: Resisto Stool
Description: Resisto, armless with glides and foot ring
Seat Height: 19” - 26”
Overall Width: 22.5”
Overall Depth: 22.5”
Finish Designation: black base and chair.
Source: Stephanie Parrish
Manufacturer: Knoll
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Manufacturer's Product Designation: 33-NA-2-BK-T-X-HC
Description: Chadwick without arms, with back and foot ring, on glides
Seat Height: 23.25” – 30.75”
Overall Width: 26.5”
Overall Depth: 26.5”
Finish Designation: Black seat and back, black base and glides
Source: Lauren Nevius – Resource One
END OF SECTION 12 51 00
FURNITURE
UIUC - U12184
12 51 00 - 2
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
ISSUED FOR BID
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
TURNER HALL CROP SCIENCES
& SOILS LAB REMODEL
12 51 00 - 3
FURNITURE
UIUC - U12184